0DJHOODQ®ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃ
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
Manual Overview .................................................................................................................... 1-2
How to Use This Manual ........................................................................................... 1-3
Manual Conventions ........................................................................................... 1-3
Connectors ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Rated Weight Capacity ....................................................................................... 1-6
Minimum Increment ............................................................................................ 1-6
Maximum Static Weight (Overload) .................................................................... 1-6
Warm-Up Time .......................................................................................................... 1-7
User Configurable Warm-up ............................................................................... 1-7
Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 1-9
Laser and Product Safety ..................................................................................................... 1-10
Bar Codes Supported ........................................................................................................... 1-14
Scanner Installation ................................................................................................................ 2-4
References ............................................................................................................................. 2-4
Scanner Usage ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
Site Preparation Overview ...................................................................................................... 2-5
Ventilation and Spacing .......................................................................................................... 2-7
Service Access ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
Power Installation ................................................................................................................... 2-9
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀL
Grounding ..................................................................................................................2-9
Liquid Spills and Moisture ........................................................................................2-11
Checkstand Mounting ..............................................................................................2-16
Installation Overview .............................................................................................................2-16
Scanner Diagnostic Mode .................................................................................2-20
Viewing Angle ..........................................................................................................2-24
Section 3. Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................3-1
Scanning Items ..........................................................................................................3-1
Proper Scanning Technique ................................................................................3-2
Proper Weighing Technique .......................................................................................3-3
Operational Controls ...............................................................................................................3-4
Operational Modes ..................................................................................................................3-4
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation ...........................................................................3-4
Error Reporting ....................................................................................................3-5
Operational Configuration ....................................................................................3-5
Operating Mode .........................................................................................................3-6
Normal Operation ................................................................................................3-6
Sleep Mode .........................................................................................................3-6
Additional Functions ................................................................................................................3-7
Programming ..............................................................................................................3-7
LL
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Vertical Scan Window Replacement ....................................................................... 3-11
Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG) ....................................................... 3-13
Diagnostic Tests ................................................................................................. 4-2
Error Codes ............................................................................................................................ 4-3
Scale Error Reporting ............................................................................................................. 4-6
Flowcharts .............................................................................................................................. 4-7
Section 5. Calibration............................................................................................................ 5-1
Description of Calibration Sequence ...................................................................................... 5-2
Automatic Zero Setting Test ................................................................................................... 5-3
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration .......................................................................... 5-4
Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) .................................................................................... 5-8
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) ................................................................................ 5-9
Shift Test ................................................................................................................... 5-9
Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) ............................................................................. 5-11
Decreasing-Load Test ............................................................................................. 5-12
Return to Zero Test ................................................................................................. 5-12
Calibration Verification (Kilograms) ...................................................................................... 5-13
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) .............................................................................. 5-13
Shift Test (Metric) .................................................................................................... 5-14
Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) ............................................................................. 5-15
Blanking Test ........................................................................................................... 5-16
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀLLL
Section 6. Programming........................................................................................................6-1
Introduction to Label Programming .........................................................................................6-1
Understanding the Basics .......................................................................................................6-1
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System .....................................................................6-1
Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation .....................................................................6-2
Programming Overview ...........................................................................................................6-3
Programming via Handheld Device ............................................................................6-3
What Is Programming Mode? ....................................................................................6-4
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. .................................................................6-4
Programming Sequence ......................................................................................6-7
LED and Beeper Indicators .....................................................................................................6-9
If You Make a Mistake... ..........................................................................................................6-9
Return to Factory Settings .........................................................................................6-9
Test Mode ................................................................................................................6-10
Double Read Timeout ..............................................................................................6-11
Laser Timeout ..........................................................................................................6-13
Good Read Beep Frequency ...................................................................................6-24
Good Read Beep Length .........................................................................................6-26
Good Read Beep Volume ........................................................................................6-27
Scale Country Mode .................................................................................................6-33
Scale Enforced Zero Return .....................................................................................6-35
Scale Automatic Zeroing ..........................................................................................6-37
Scale Interface Type ................................................................................................6-38
Scale Motion Level Filter ..........................................................................................6-40
Scale LED Enable ....................................................................................................6-42
LY
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Remote Display — Enable/Disable ......................................................................... 6-43
EAS Active State ..................................................................................................... 6-44
EAS Timeout ........................................................................................................... 6-45
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT) ....................................... 6-49
Interface Related Features ................................................................................................... 6-50
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection ...................................................... 6-53
IBM Port 17 Interface Selection ........................................................................ 6-55
IBM USB Interface Selection ............................................................................ 6-56
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length ......................................................... 6-57
Global Suffix ............................................................................................................ 6-61
IBM Features ........................................................................................................................ 6-63
IBM USB Interface Options ..................................................................................... 6-67
IBM USB Scanner Device Type .............................................................................. 6-69
RS-232 Features .................................................................................................................. 6-70
RS-232 Baud Rate .................................................................................................. 6-70
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits ................................................................................... 6-75
RS-232 Parity .......................................................................................................... 6-76
RS-232 Hardware Control ....................................................................................... 6-78
RS-232 Host Echo ................................................................................................... 6-82
RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval ............................................................................ 6-83
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands ............................................................................. 6-84
RS-232 TTL ............................................................................................................. 6-85
RS-232 TTL Invert ................................................................................................... 6-86
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL .................................................................................... 6-87
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀY
RS-232 Beep on Not on File ....................................................................................6-89
Single Cable RS-232 Options .............................................................................................6-101
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection .............................................................6-103
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK .....................................................................6-107
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX ..............................................................................6-108
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character ..............................................................6-109
Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX ..............................................................................6-110
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character ..............................................................6-111
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 .....................................................................................6-116
UPC/EAN AIM ID ...................................................................................................6-117
UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-119
UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-120
UPC-E Enable .....................................................................................................................6-122
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ..................................................6-123
UPC-E Check Character Transmission ..................................................................6-124
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A .......................................................................................6-125
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 .....................................................................................6-126
UPC-E Label ID ......................................................................................................6-127
UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-128
YL
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable ......................................................................... 6-134
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................. 6-136
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................. 6-137
Bookland Label ID ................................................................................................. 6-140
EAN-8 Enable ..................................................................................................................... 6-141
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 ..................................................................................... 6-143
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................... 6-145
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................... 6-146
EAN-8 Decoding Levels ........................................................................................ 6-148
Other UPC/EAN Options .................................................................................................... 6-151
Enable EAN Two Label ......................................................................................... 6-156
Addons .................................................................................................................. 6-157
UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels ................................................................... 6-159
GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ..................................................................... 6-164
GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ..................................................................... 6-165
GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID ................................................................ 6-166
RSS-14 Enable ................................................................................................................... 6-167
RSS-14 Check Character Transmission ................................................................ 6-168
RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation ................................................................................. 6-169
RSS-14 2D Component Enable ............................................................................. 6-170
RSS-14 AIM ID ...................................................................................................... 6-171
RSS-14 Label ID .................................................................................................... 6-172
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀYLL
RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable .................................................................6-175
RSS Expanded Label ID ........................................................................................6-177
RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length ................................................................6-179
RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length .................................................................6-180
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission .........................................................6-184
Code 39 Check Character Transmission ...............................................................6-186
Code 39 Full ASCII ................................................................................................6-187
Code 39 Label ID ...................................................................................................6-189
Code 39 Maximum Label Length ...........................................................................6-191
Code 39 Minimum Label Length ............................................................................6-192
Pharmacode 39 Label ID .......................................................................................6-199
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters ...............................................................6-201
Convert Code128 to Code 39 ................................................................................6-202
Code 128 Label ID .................................................................................................6-204
Code 128 Length Control .......................................................................................6-205
Code 128 Maximum Label Length .........................................................................6-206
Code 128 Minimum Label Length ..........................................................................6-207
Code 128 Fixed Length 1 .......................................................................................6-208
Code 128 Fixed Length 2 .......................................................................................6-209
YLLL
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Code 128 Stitching ................................................................................................ 6-210
EAN 128 AIM ID .................................................................................................... 6-212
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 OF 5) Enable ................................................................................... 6-214
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................. 6-216
I 2 of 5 Label ID ..................................................................................................... 6-218
I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length ............................................................................. 6-220
I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length .............................................................................. 6-221
Codabar Start Stop Character Match .................................................................... 6-229
Codabar Check Character Transmission .............................................................. 6-231
Codabar Label ID .................................................................................................. 6-233
Codabar Length Control ........................................................................................ 6-234
Codabar Maximum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-235
Codabar Minimum Label Length ........................................................................... 6-236
Code 93 Label ID ................................................................................................... 6-242
Code 93 Length Control ........................................................................................ 6-243
Code 93 Maximum Label Length ........................................................................... 6-244
Code 93 Minimum Label Length ............................................................................ 6-245
Code 93 Fixed Length 1 ........................................................................................ 6-246
Code 93 Fixed Length 2 ........................................................................................ 6-247
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀL[
MSI/Plessey Enable ............................................................................................................6-249
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation ............................................................6-250
MSI/Plessey AIM ID ...............................................................................................6-253
MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 ..................................................................................6-258
MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 ..................................................................................6-259
MSI/Plessey Stitching ............................................................................................6-260
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ....................................................6-263
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID ........................................................................................6-265
Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length ................................................................6-267
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length .................................................................6-268
Controls and Indicators .......................................................................................................... A-1
Indicator LEDs ................................................................................................................. A-2
Calibration Switch ............................................................................................................ A-5
Calibration Switch Seal ............................................................................................. A-5
Calibration Switch Cover ........................................................................................... A-6
Appendix B. Cable Information ........................................................................................... B-1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. B-1
General Specifications ..................................................................................................... B-1
Wire Requirements ................................................................................................... B-1
[
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
RS-232 Cable Pinout .............................................................................................................. B-2
Connector Hardware .................................................................................................B-2
Connector Hardware .................................................................................................B-3
IBM Cable Pinout ....................................................................................................................B-4
Scanner and Scale ...........................................................................................................B-4
Connector Hardware .................................................................................................B-4
IBM USB Cable Pinout ...........................................................................................................B-5
Scanner and Scale ...........................................................................................................B-5
Connector Hardware .................................................................................................B-5
External Handheld Input ................................................................................................... B-6
Connector Hardware .................................................................................................B-6
EAS Interlock Connector ........................................................................................................ B-7
Scanner and Scale ...........................................................................................................B-7
Connector Hardware .................................................................................................B-7
Appendix D. Host Commands .............................................................................................D-1
Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host ...........................................................D-1
Appendix F. Handheld Data Format Requirements ........................................................... F-1
Handheld Data Format Requirements General ......................................................... F-1
PSC Handheld Data Format Requirements .............................................................. F-2
RSS-14 ............................................................................................................... F-2
RSS Expanded ................................................................................................... F-2
UPC-A ................................................................................................................. F-2
UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental ....................................................................... F-2
UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental ....................................................................... F-3
UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental .................................................................. F-3
UPC-E ................................................................................................................. F-3
UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental ....................................................................... F-4
UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental ....................................................................... F-4
UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental .................................................................. F-4
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ[L
EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental ........................................................................F-5
EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental ........................................................................F-5
EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental ......................................................................F-6
EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental ......................................................................F-6
Code 39-Pharmacode .........................................................................................F-7
2-Digit Supplemental .........................................................................................F-11
5-Digit Supplemental .........................................................................................F-11
Code 93 .............................................................................................................F-13
RSS-14 ..............................................................................................................F-13
RSS Expanded ..................................................................................................F-14
I 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................F-14
Code 128 / EAN128 ...........................................................................................F-14
PDF417 .............................................................................................................F-15
[LL
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6HFWLRQ ꢂ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on
how to install the scanner or scanning-scale (either model may be termed
“scanner” for the purpose of simplicity in this manual), how to program it
using special programming feature bar code labels, and advanced user
information as described in the following overview.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ
0DQXDOꢀ2YHUYLHZ
Section 1, Introduction, presents the manual’s contents, describes features
the bar code symbologies the scanner will read.
Section 2, Site Preparation and Installation, supplies physical dimensions
for the scanner or scanning-scale and its most common accessories, and
and testing are also explained in this section.
Section 3, Operation and Maintenance, describes use and maintenance;
providing details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic
nance are outlined in this section as well.
Section 4, Problem Isolation, provides an outline of three scanning-scale
of the error indications if the scanner detects a system problem and trou-
bleshooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented.
Section 5, Calibration, explains scale calibration and verification proce-
kilograms.
for setting programmable scanner and scanning-scale features. This sec-
Features and Symbology Related Features.
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls, lists the various functions
Appendix B, Cable Information, outlines wire requirements, connector
specifications and pinout details for associated product cabling.
Appendix C, Keypad, furnishes bar codes representing the digits and char-
acters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain
programming sessions.
Appendix D, Host Commands, contains a partial listing of available host
commands that can be used with a compatible host interface.
ꢂꢃꢁ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
+RZꢀWRꢀ8VHꢀ7KLVꢀ0DQXDO
You’ll find it helpful to familiarize yourself with the first section of this
manual, since it provides both a general description of the product’s fea-
tures and an overview of the manual’s contents and organization. Refer-
ence the other sections as required for information about scanner or
scanning-scale installation, operation, maintenance, calibration and bar
code programming.
0DQXDOꢀ&RQYHQWLRQV
‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful
and recommended. They provide information that
is critical to operations and/or procedures
described in this manual.
‘LEGAL NOTE’ blocks indicate procedures or
activities which may be regulated under law by
LEGAL NOTE
governmental agencies. It is your responsibility to
ensure compliance with the regulations that gov-
ern installation of weighing devices.
‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling
(adherence to the procedures described) is
required to avoid damage to equipment and/or
property.
‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical
harm or injury. These statements do not include
potentially fatal hazards, which would be desig-
nated as ‘DANGER’ blocks. Use of this product
does not warrant the need for a DANGER block.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢄ
6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDQQLQJꢃ6FDOHꢀ1RPHQFODWXUH
Controls, indicators and other nomenclature are shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1. Scanning-Scale Nomenclature
Green LED
Volume/Tone Push Button
Weighing Surface — Lean
Yellow LED
Vertical Window
Bonnet
Horizontal Window
Produce Rail
Scale Zero
Push Button
All Weighs™ Platter
ꢂꢃꢅ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RQQHFWRUV
The appearance of the connector panel will vary depending upon the fac-
tory options purchased with your model. Reference Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2. Connector Panel
0.00
POS Terminal
Remote Display
Aux. Port
Scale Host
EAS Interlock
Power
POS TERMINAL
· Label Data
· Scale Data (for
single cable interfaces)
· Application Download
(where appropriate)
REMOTE DISPLAY AUXILIARY PORT
SCALE HOST
EAS INTERLOCK
POWER
· Test Port
· On Screen
Drives Remote Display
Scale Data (dual
cable scanner/scale)
· Provides Good Read
output to enable EAS
antenna RF output
· Provides signal to
drive external speaker
AC Brick Input
OR
Power off Terminal
(POT) Brick Input
Programming (OSP)
· Application Download
· RS-232 Handheld
Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232
Label Data Output
Connection to
this port is
Optional
Models with scale
only
Connection to
this port is
Optional
Dual cable units only.
(Scale connection may
be handled through
POS Terminal port)
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢆ
3K\VLFDOꢀ3DUDPHWHUV
This section provides specifications for performance, environmental and
electrical parameters. Reference the second section of this manual, Site
Preparation and Installation, for physical measurements of all models and
some accessories.
6FDQQLQJ
:HLJKLQJ
The scanner has a scan zone between the two windows where the scanner
projects laser light in order to scan items. Two separate projections, one
from the horizontal window and one from the vertical window, combine
to form a zone where bar code labels are read. Refer to the Operation and
ning Items.
Specifications for scale capacity, settling time, minimum and maximum
static weight, zeroing, and warm-up time are given below. For more infor-
mation regarding the topic: Proper Weighing Technique, refer to the Opera-
tion and Maintenance section of this manual.
5DWHGꢀ:HLJKWꢀ&DSDFLW\
The scale’s operational weight capacity is:
•
30.00 pounds, displayed in 0.01 increments
OR
1
•
15.000 kilograms , displayed in 0.005 increments.
0LQLPXPꢀ,QFUHPHQW
The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0.02
lb. (0.005 kg).
0D[LPXPꢀ6WDWLFꢀ:HLJKWꢀꢈ2YHUORDGꢉ
A maximum static weight of 150 pounds (68 kg) can be sustained by the
scale without incurring damage or degrading performance.
1. The scale can also be set for 9.99 kg max.
ꢂꢃꢇ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$XWRPDWLFꢀ=HURꢀ0DLQWHQDQFH
The scale’s software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as
1
long as the deviation is within acceptable limits , while compensating for
any debris accumulation or removal. During power-up, the scale automat-
ically re-zeros after verifying that all subsystems are functional. Addition-
ally, the scale may be manually “zeroed” by pushing the Scale Zero Push
Button located on the top of the vertical enclosure.
:DUPꢃ8Sꢀ7LPH
There are two pertinent warm-up times that apply to the scanner or scan-
ning-scale:
The two warm-up periods can be performed concurrently, thereby reducing
the total required warm-up time to 60 minutes.
NOTE
7KHUPDOꢀ(TXLOLEULXP
When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area)
to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), 60 minutes
must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to cali-
bration or operation.
3RZHUꢃXS
Once installed and powered up, a warm-up time of 15 minutes must be
allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations.
8VHUꢀ&RQILJXUDEOHꢀ:DUPꢃXS
The user may configure the unit for a pre-programmed warm-up time
that is activated every time the scanner is powered up. During this time,
the scale is viewed by the POS terminal as off-line.
1. Acceptable limitis of deviation are set at -0.2 to +0.6 pounds (-0.078kg to 0.23kg), which is -0.67 to
+2.0% of total capacity.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢊ
Contact technical support to learn more about this advanced programmable
feature.
NOTE
Figure 1-3. Environmental Specifications
Operation
+40
10
C
C
+104
F
50
F
Temperature
10 to +40 C
50 to +104 F
Dust Proof Optics Cavity, IP5X
Illumination
Artificial Light:
0-450 Foot-candles
(4,842 LUX)
Sunlight:
0-8,000 Foot-candles
(86,080 LUX)
Humidity
Hot / Wet 40˚C / 95% RH
Hot / Dry 40˚C / 5% RH
Spill Proof
(PSC MS-0006-13-0004)
Cold / Dry 10˚C / 5% RH
Warm / Wet 25%C / 50% RH
Storage
+70
-40
C
+158
-40
F
C
F
POS
Sc
an
ner
Temperature
-40 to +70 C
-40 to +158 F
ꢂꢃꢋ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
(OHFWULFDOꢀ6SHFLILFDWLRQV
Before installation, always verify that the site’s electrical service meets the
scanning-scale’s requirements. The scanner has been engineered for com-
patibility with most international electrical systems operating in ranges
from 100 to 240VAC at 50-60 Hz. Verify that the power source will sup-
ply “clean” electrical power to the equipment; that is, it must be free of
excess electrical noise.
Check the IEC power cord shipped with the scanning-scale. If the cord
will not plug into your AC power receptacle, the power cord shipped is
not compatible with your electrical system. Please contact your distributor
immediately to receive the necessary information and components to
ensure electrical compatibility.
3RZHUꢀ6XSSO\
The scanner utilizes a single power supply for all models. Unique installa-
tion and international connections are accomplished through selection of
the proper IEC power cord
VOLTAGE
100-240VAC 10%
FREQUENCY
50-60 Hz
CURRENT (RMS)
0.5 Amps @ 100V
PART NUMBER
8-0559
Safe operation of your scanner or scanning-scale requires properly grounded
electrical outlets. Be sure to have a qualified electrician certify the earth-
ground connection on circuits which will be used to power the unit.
CAUTION
The scanner is powered on/off by connecting/disconnecting its AC power
supply.
NOTE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢌ
/DVHUꢀDQGꢀ3URGXFWꢀ6DIHW\
Laser safety requirements are based on IEC Standard Publication 60825-1
(2001) and CDRH 21CFR, Chapter 1, Subchapter J and (CDRH) Laser
Product Performance Standard, User information [1040.10(h)1]:
•
User Maintenance. No user maintenance of the system other than
cleaning of the scan windows is required.
•
Radiant Energy. The scanner is an IEC Class 1 and CDRH IIa
laser product. The system uses two embedded Class 3B Visible
Laser Diodes (VLDs) operating at 650.0 or 670.0 nm, in an
opto-mechanical scanner, resulting in less than 3.9µW radiated
power as observed through a 7mm aperture and averaged over 10
seconds. Maximum emitted peak output power at the lower win-
dow is 850µW. No attempt should be made by the user to remove
the protective housing of the scanning-scale.
•
Laser Light Viewing. The horizontal and vertical scan windows
are the only apertures through which laser light may be observed
in this product.
Exposure to the light emitted from the scan windows has been shown not
to be harmful. The safety record of bar code scanning is perfect after mil-
lions of hours of use worldwide. This safe and efficient use of laser tech-
nology has gained wide acceptance in industries throughout the world.
Operators and installers of the unit should observe the following cautions
and warnings:
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous laser light exposure.
The use of optical instruments with the scanner will increase eye hazard. (Opti-
cal instruments include binoculars, microscopes, telescopes and magnifying
glasses. This does not include eyeglasses worn by the user).
CAUTION
To prevent exposure to laser light, do not remove the protective housing of the
scanner. There are no user-serviceable parts inside your scanner or scanning-
scale.
ꢂꢃꢂꢍ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Safety precautions to be taken:
No adjustments or alteration of the scanner or scanning-scale housing are to be
attempted by the user.
The failure of the facet wheel motor while the unit is continuing to emit a laser
beam causes the emission levels to exceed those for inherently safe operation.
The unit has safeguards to prevent this occurrence. If, however, a stationary
laser beam is ever emitted, the failing unit should be disconnected from its
power supply until repaired by a qualified technician.
CAUTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment gener-
ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his or her own expense.
WARNING
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toute les exigences du
Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢂꢂ
/DEHOLQJ
Regulatory, reference and safety labeling is shown in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4. Labeling
This illustration shows label placement
ONLY. For actual regulatory, patent and
other applicable information, view the
labels on the product itself, or call your
III
Or...
n
IEC
LASER
PRODUCT
N
=
max
nearest sales or service office.
=
max
III
Max
Min
e =
e
=
min
U.S., CANADA, MEXICO AND JAPAN
Max
Min
e =
6-0824
CAPACITE
CAPACITY
M
SESLEX
PSC
PSC Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
SERIAL NUMBER BARCODE
Eugene, Oregon, USA 97402
PSC, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402 USA
I
t.
t
t
f
d
S
r
n
6-0825
t
:
ꢂꢃꢂꢁ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$JHQF\ꢀ&RPSOLDQFHV
The scanner and scanning-scale meets or exceeds the requirements for its
device type as set forth by the following agencies and regulations:
COUNTRY
Electrical
United States
COMPLIANCE
COMMENTS
UL 1950
TÜV NRTL
TÜV NRTL
TÜV CB
Canada
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1950
IEC60950 / IEC 825-1:2001
AS 3260
World
Australia
AS (power adapter)
Emmisions
United States
47CFR Part 15J
ICES-0003
FCC
Canada
Class B
Class B
Class B
Class B
Class B
CE Mark
CE Mark
Europe
EN 55022
Australia/N Zealand
Japan
AS/NZ 3548
VCCI
Taiwan
CNS 13438
Safety & Emissions
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
LV Directive 73/23/EEC
Laser Safety
United States
CDRH, 21CFR Part 1040
same as CDRH
AS 2211
CDRH Class IIa laser device
SGM-1 specification
Canada
Australia
Weights & Measures
United States
NIST Handbook 44
(Dept. of Commerce)
Canada
Measures Canada
NSC
Australia
New Zealand
Mexico
1987 Part 1
NOM
Reg. 4, Reg. 4A
NOM-019-SCF1-1994
New York
New York Certificate
Contact PSC® Marketing at (541) 683-5700, or your PSC representative
for a complete listing of approvals for other countries.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀꢂꢃꢂꢄ
%DUꢀ&RGHVꢀ6XSSRUWHG
The scanner can read/decode the following bar code types (symbologies):
•
•
UPC Versions A & E
UPC Supplementals and Add-ons (2 & 5 digit supplimentals,
Coupon code and Code 128)
•
•
Plural Stage Dual UPC Bar Codes for Japan ( 2 label read)
Reduced Space Symbology (RSS) RSS-14, RSS expanded, RSS
Stacked
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EAN-8 & 13
JAN-8 & 13
UCC/EAN 128
Code 39
Code 39 full ASCII
Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39)
Code 93
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
Italian Pharmacode (Code 39)
Codabar
MSI/Plessey
ꢂꢃꢂꢅ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6HFWLRQ ꢁ
6LWHꢀ3UHSDUDWLRQꢀDQGꢀ,QVWDOODWLRQ
the scanner or scanning-scale. Included are physical parameters and
instructions for checkstand preparation, power and ventilation consider-
ations, cable routing information and unit installation.
Site Preparation lists all procedures necessary to prepare the checkstand.
The instructions that follow, titled Checkstand Preparation, detail steps for
the three models that are available (shown in Figure 2-1 below) to facili-
tate easy installation into almost any checkstand application around the
world:
Model 8500 — Short Scanner
Model 8501 — Long Scanner
Model 8502 — Long Scanning-Scale
Some models are designed to fit with little or no modification into open-
ings cut for previously installed scanners such as other PSC® Magellan®
scanners, or NCR® scanner models 7820/24 and 7870. Other models are
Once the procedures in this section are complete, the scanner is ready for
operation; with the exception that if a scanning-scale was installed, cali-
bration will be required before placing the unit into operation. You must
consult the local weights and measures authority to ensure that all legal
requirements are met concerning calibration and certification. Section 5,
Calibration, contains detailed procedures for calibrating the scale in either
pounds or kilograms.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-1
Figure 2-1. The Scanner/Scale Family
Model 8500
Model 8501
Model 8502
3UHꢃ,QVWDOODWLRQꢀ&RQVLGHUDWLRQV
It should be noted that the scope of this manual does not encompass all
factors related to worker safety and checkstand design. It does, however,
offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring greater safety
and productivity. Careful planning using these general guidelines should
result in a more efficient, comfortable work environment.
The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive
motion injuries has increased dramatically in recent years. Checkstand
design and scanner installation and operation procedures can reduce the
risk of repetitive motion injuries, but not eliminate it.
Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergo-
nomics, the Food Marketing Institute (FMI) and the National Institute of
Occupational Safety (NIOSH) of the Department of Health and Human
Services have released the reports listed at the end of these recommenda-
tions. These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic improve-
ment of checkstand designs and scanner installation, maintenance and
usage. Portions of the reports are summarized below. For copies of the
complete reports, or to inquire about any modifications to the recommen-
dations, contact FMI and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of
these recommendations.
2-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&KHFNVWDQGꢀ'HVLJQ
1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle
groups (for example designs which allow the cashier to use both
hands for scanning and bagging).
2. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an
input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart.
These designs put less stress on the cashiers’ shoulders and back.
3. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away convey-
ors (i.e., the distance the cashier has to reach to move the prod-
ucts).
4. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier’s
reach to items on the far side of the belt; use a diverter to direct
products closer to the cashier.
5. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products
across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the
horizontal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding sur-
faces.
6. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to elimi-
nate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks.
7. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches
(33 - 43.2 cm) lower than the top surface of the checkstand to
reduce stresses to the shoulders, elbows, and risks associated with
lifting products into bags.
8. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scan-
ner, due to the increased reach involved.
9. Position the scanner’s horizontal scanning surface 34 - 36 inches
(86.4 - 91.4 cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five
inches (12.7 cm) clearance between elbows and work surfaces.
10. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizon-
tal reach).
11. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices
the cashier uses within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm).
12. Provide adequate toe space, foot rests or rails, antifatigue mats,
and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the
cashiers can lean.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-3
6FDQQHUꢀ,QVWDOODWLRQ
1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the coun-
tertop to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting.
2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3
- 25.4 cm) from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side).
6FDQQHUꢀ0DLQWHQDQFH
1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and
reduce rescans.
2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident.
5HIHUHQFHV
Anonymous, 1992, “Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand
Designs”,
Food Marketing Institute
800 Connecticut Ave. N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006
Grant, Katharyn A. et al., 1992, “Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand
Designs in the Retail Food Industry”,
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
4676 Columbia Parkway
Cincinnati, Ohio 45226
6FDQQHUꢀ8VDJH
1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in
the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of
short PLUs, or handheld scanning.
2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergo-
nomics principles, such as:
Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing
work equally between hands.
Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
2-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top
and bottom, there is no need to turn a bar code toward either
of the scanner windows.
Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster
hand movements. Simply slide the item across the scanner’s
horizontal window with as little orientation motion as neces-
sary.
Leave items in an upright position; do not lift and tilt.
Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area
is located.
Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window; slide
items across the scanner in their natural orientations on the
checkstand as much as possible.
6LWHꢀ3UHSDUDWLRQꢀ2YHUYLHZ
Consider the following factors before installing the scanner/scanning-scale
and its optional Remote Scale Display.
Ventilation Requirements. The scanner operates without the use of a
ventilation fan. As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no
major heat producing equipment in close proximity, the unit’s housing
provides adequate heat dissipation. The air temperature in the checkstand
around the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).
Service Access Requirements. Routine operations such as ‘zeroing’
and calibration do not require removal of the scanner from the checkstand
or disassembly of the product. The installer should plan service access for
Recommended Power Installation. Since the typical grocery environ-
ment includes conveyor belts and electric motors, care should be taken to
ensure that the scanner has a supply of “clean” power (power without
excessive electrical noise). A wiring diagram shows the recommended wir-
ing that will provide the scanner with a “clean” source of power. Refer to
Figure 2-4.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-5
Counter Preparation. Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are
designed as “left-hand take away,” the counter drawings in this section
focus on this counter design. Simply reverse the layout for a “right-hand
take away” requirement. The unit scans equally well in either of these two
configurations.
Liquid Drainage. Should a liquid spill occur, ensure that moisture can
flow through the checkstand without pooling.
Leveling. Plan ahead and provide screws/bolts in the checkstand mounts
and a leveling guide (board) to allow leveling of the scanner or scanning-
scale within the counter. Use a 0.375” thick board to replicate the mount-
ing flange on the long scanner or scanning-scale, and adjust screws or bolts
until the board is flush within the counter. Use a 4.0” wide board stood on
its end to adjust leveling screws/bolts in rail support applications.
Cable Routing. Placement of the scanning-scale should be planned to
allow easy access to other components as well as optimize communication
between the scanner, the POS terminal and the optional Remote Scale
Display. Note that cables may drop straight down from the scanner’s con-
nector panel, or may be conveniently routed along the unit’s side using the
hardware provided. Do not route interface cables near any electrical
motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
Remote Scale Display Placement. The customer, and checker in some
instances, must be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Display.
Ambient light and mounting height considerations are discussed later in
this section.
Vertical Clearance. Provision must be made to allow adequate space
above the scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of the All
Weighs™ Platter (the L-shaped platter). Optimal clearance permits the
platter to be grasped at its top vertical edge and lifted for removal without
obstruction (such as a fixed keyboard mount or any type of enclosure).
Should such an enclosure be unavoidable, an alternate method of platter
removal using two coins may be employed, however a minimum vertical
clearance of 1.5” (3.8 cm) MUST be provided (reference Figure 2-2).
Another consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstruc-
tions such as enclosures, keyboard mounts, etc.
2-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 2-2. Vertical Clearance
DO NOT
Obstruct
L-Platter
Removal
DO NOT
Obstruct
Scan Zone
(Keyboard Mount)
Allow a minimum
clearance of
1.5" (3.8cm)
(Enclosure)
9HQWLODWLRQꢀDQGꢀ6SDFLQJ
The scanning-scale’s perimeter housing has been designed to provide ade-
quate space for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the
weighing apparatus. Figure 2-3 shows the debris chutes and ventilation
slots. The checkstand design must allow:
•
The ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to
the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).
•
A source of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air
flow.
DO NOT place the scanner in a close-fitting, fully enclosed checkstand. Pro-
vide a MINIMUM of 16 square inches (103.2 square centimeters) of air intake
from below the installation for sufficient convective cooling.
NOTE
If motors, conveyor belts, or other heat producing equipment are located
near the scanner, forced air ventilation may be required. In most installa-
tions, a 30 cfm (.84 cmm) axial fan should provide sufficient air move-
ment. If a ventilation fan is installed, one with a removable filter that may
be washed or replaced is recommended.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-7
Figure 2-3. Debris Chutes & Ventilation Slots
Debris Chutes/Ventilation Slots
6HUYLFHꢀ$FFHVV
The scanner and scanning-scale have been engineered to allow perfor-
mance of all routine service and maintenance (such as “zeroing” and cali-
bration) without removing the scanner from the checkstand. Additionally
all cable connections made at the scanner can be connected and removed
while the unit is sitting on the countertop. The installer should provide
service access to all remaining cable connectors as well as the AC/DC
Power Supply (if installed).
2-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3RZHUꢀ,QVWDOODWLRQ
Reference the wiring diagram in Figure 2-4 for the recommended fusing
arrangement.
*URXQGLQJ
The AC/DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth
ground. If you are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise
(interference) on the power line, ask a qualified electrician to measure the
input line voltage.
Figure 2-4. Input Power Wiring
On/Off
Switch
Scanner or
Scanner/Scale
AC/DC Power
Supply
Checkstand
Breaker Panel
Neutral
Line
Ground
On/Off
Switch
Neutral
Line
Ground
Panel
Ground
POS Terminal
Neutral
Line
Main
Breaker
Power
Mains
Panel
Ground
Inductive Loads
(e.g. Conveyor Belts, Motors, etc)
Earth
Ground
Panel
Ground
Lighting
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-9
&KHFNVWDQGꢀ3UHSDUDWLRQ
Reference Figure 2-5. When performing a first time installation into a
new checkstand, verify before cutting that room will be allowed for
cabling and the AC/DC Power Supply. When making the opening, take
extra care to accurately cut to the correct dimensions. Mounting may
require installation of support(s), countertop routing, or other such
devices. Depending upon checkstand design, you may wish to install an
item diverter to direct items toward the scan window. See the instructions
in this manual titled “Counter Cutout” for more details concerning the
location and preparation of the opening.
Figure 2-5. Installation Overview
Counter Cutout
Item
Diverter
AC/DC
Routed
Power
Support
Supply
Lip
Cabling
Support Rails
2-10
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
/LTXLGꢀ6SLOOVꢀDQGꢀ0RLVWXUHꢀ
Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through, and directs
liquids away from any electronic equipment or storage areas.
&RXQWHUꢀ&XWRXW
The most important consideration when planning the counter opening
for the scanner is the operator’s comfortable reaching distance. The ideal,
ergonomically sound installation allows items to be directed within easy
reach, and a scanning area requiring no lifting or special orientation of
items. If you haven’t already read the information at the beginning of this
section titled, Pre-Installation Considerations, please do so before continu-
ing these instructions.
The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass
items from one hand to the other while scanning (either from right-to-left
or left-to-right). With the unique 360- scan zone, scanning is accom-
plished in one fluid motion. The operator simply slides the item from the
conveyor belt or diverter area through the scanning area and passes the
item to the other hand, which in turn bags it or places it on a take-away
conveyor belt. Movement should flow naturally over the surface of the
scanner.
accept a scanner, or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design
will not be accurate for all installations. Although these guidelines will suf-
fice for most standard installations, the installer may need to make adjust-
ments for varying counter heights and thicknesses, support design, or
other checkstand limitations.
Follow these basic steps to install the unit:
1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow
which best accommodates the reaching distance of the average
operator.
2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Select the appropriate draw-
ing from Figure 2-7, or Figure 2-8 for your model.
3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable
and the interface cable(s) observing the following:
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-11
Interface cables (and display cable, if applicable) should be
routed away from all highly inductive electrical devices, like
motors and conveyor belts, and even away from the unit’s
power cable if possible.
Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replace-
ment is required. A little planning now will save a lot of frus-
tration later.
4. Connect and verify all system operations.
The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the
All Weighs™ Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth,
slide-through scanning (reference the insert in Figure 2-6). Keep in mind
that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter provide the necessary
clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a scanning-scale
(you won’t need to provide an additional gap for that).
2-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 2-6. Typical Checkstand Design & Cutout Location
Remote Display
Conveyor
POS Terminal
& Printer
Optional
Item Diverter
Deadplate
Scanner
6.3"
(16.0cm)
Keyboard
Cash Drawer
(Below Scanner)
Scan & Bag
Well
(Optional)
Check
Writing
Flush — Correct
Stand
Take-Away
Belt
(Optional)
Bagging
Area
Above Flush — Incorrect
Below Flush — Incorrect
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-13
Refer to the appropriate drawing (Figure 2-7, Model 8500; Figure 2-8,
Models 8501 and 8502) for dimensional information on the model you’ll
be installing.
Figure 2-7. Model 8500 (Short Scanner) Cutout Dimensions
6.95"
(17.65cm)
Model 8500
Dimensions
Window
6.2"
(15.75cm)
7.0" (17.78cm)
5.0" (12.7cm)
12.0"
(30.5cm)
16.5"
41.91cm)
22 lb.
(10kg)
11.5"
11.1"
(29.21cm) (28.19cm)
SCANNER PLATTER
Scanner Weight
7.75"
(19.69cm)
Model 8500
Cutout
Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
16.625" .060"
(42.23cm)
11.625"
(29.53cm)
Model 8500
Supports
5" .062 (12.7cm)
Liquid
Drainage
Liquid
Drainage
Support Rails
2-14
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 2-8. Models 8501 and 8502 Long Scanner or Scanning-Scale Cutout Dimensions
6.95"
(17.65cm)
Model 8501
& Model 8502
Dimensions
Window
8.9"
(22.60cm)
7.0" (17.78cm)
5.0" (12.7cm)
12.0"
(30.5cm)
20.0"
(50.8cm)
26 lb.
(11.7kg)
22 lb.
(10kg)
11.5"
11.1"
(29.21cm) (28.19cm)
SCANNER PLATTER
Scanner/Scale
Weight
Scanner
Weight (w/o scale)
11.25"
(28.58cm)
Model 8501
& Model 8502
Cutout
20.125"
(51.12cm)
Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
18.625"
(47.308cm)
Rail
3.06" .006"
(7.77 0.15 cm)
0.75"
(1.905cm)
11.625"
(29.53cm)
(Center Line)
Rail
0.75"
(1.905cm)
0.375" .030"
(0.952 0.07 cm)
If leveling feet are needed
3.06" .006"
(7.77 0.15 cm)
for models 8501 and 8502,
use the placement shown here,
represented with plus signs (+).
0.375" .030"
(0.952 0.07 cm)
Model 8501
& Model 8502
Supports
20.125" 0.06"
(51.2 0.15 cm)
1.5"
(3.8 cm)
0.75"
(1.9 cm)
0.375" 0.03" (.95 .08 cm)
0.75" .060"
(1.9 0.15 cm)
0.75" .060"
(1.9 0.15 cm)
18.625" .060"
(47.3 0.15 cm)
Liquid
Drainage
4.0"
Liquid
Drainage
(10.2 cm)
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-15
&KHFNVWDQGꢀ0RXQWLQJ
There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit
ity and stability. Consider the scanner or scanning-scale’s weight when cal-
culating the robustness of construction needed to support it as well as
maximum capacity of weighed and scanned items.
If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0.75” (1.9 cm) ply-
wood, you’ll need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for
the support flanges (see Figure 2-5). This support strip should minimally be
wide and 14.0” (35.6 cm) long. This strip should be glued as well as screwed
to the underside of the countertop.
NOTE
,QVWDOODWLRQꢀ2YHUYLHZ
The preceding Site Preparation Overview dealt with installed location and
counter preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanning-scale. Hav-
ing completed those steps, physical installation of the scanner or scanning-
scale can begin. The following instructions apply to all models.
This section describes:
1. Unpacking the unit.
2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system.
3. Routing and connecting cables.
4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match
the POS terminal’s system requirements.
5. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the
POS system.
The following text describes each of these steps.
8QSDFNLQJ
To unpack the unit:
•
Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred
during shipping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier
immediately.
2-16
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
•
•
•
Lift out the accessory box containing the AC/DC Power Supply,
optional Remote Scale Display and cable (if present), and the
Quick Reference Guide.
Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with
the unit’s controls and features. Leave the guide at the checkstand
Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the
carton. Be sure to save the box and all packing material. In the
event of failure, the unit must be returned to the factory in its
original packaging.
•
Carefully lift off the All Weighs™ Platter as shown in
Figure 2-17 and remove the protective foam pieces securing the
weigh mechanism. Set the platter back in place.
For added protection during shipment, the All Weighs™ Platter is covered
with a tight-fitting layer of vinyl as shown in Figure 2-9. This vinyl layer
MUST BE REMOVED before placing the unit into service.
NOTE
Figure 2-9. Remove Protective Vinyl
Protective vinyl
MUST be removed
from the
platter
before use.
•
Proceed to the Operational Verification instructions below.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-17
2SHUDWLRQDOꢀ9HULILFDWLRQ
Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is
fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to
your POS system.
1. If the unit is a scanning-scale, connect the Remote Scale Display
Figure 2-13). Note that if the Remote Scale Display is not con-
nected, a scanner power-up Selftest will sound a long, low beep,
and the number “8” will appear on the 7-segment display indicat-
ing a remote display error. Power-down, connect a known-good
Remote Display to the appropriate port, and restart to correct this
problem. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using
programming bar codes (see Section 6, Programming for more
information).
2. Connect the power cable at the scanner then at the AC outlet.
When power is applied to the unit, the normal indicator sequence is:
•
•
The green light will be lit (dim) steadily.
If the Selftest detects a problem, the 7-segment display will dis-
play a number code. Refer to Section 4, Problem Isolation, for a
description of failure codes and problem isolation procedures.
Scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a zero reading on the display
on rare occasions.
NOTE
3. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium
before proceeding to the next steps. (Reference the topic Warm-
Up Time in Section 1.) When the unit is moved from a cooler
temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment
(such as a checkstand location), a period of 60 minutes must be
allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions. Once
installed and powered up, a “power-up” warm-up period of 15
minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weigh-
ing operations. These two warm-up periods may run concur-
rently.
2-18
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
4. Verify that the scanner or scanning-scale passes an operational test
by observing the following:
Scanner. Pass UPC/EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner’s win-
dows. Since the interface cable is not yet connected to the POS
terminal, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two
labels (see the note that follows). The scanner indicates when each
label has been successfully read by flashing the green scanner light
and emitting a good read tone (beep).
When not connected to the host, the scanner may be limited to reading only
one or two labels. (This limitation is dependent upon the interface type.) To
scan multiple labels without connecting to the host, place the unit in Scanner
Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Volume/Tone Push Button for four seconds.
NOTE
Scale. If the Yellow LED is not lit, press the Scale Zero Push Button
momentarily. If the scale is operating correctly, the yellow LED
will illuminate and remain on steady, and the display will show a
reading of 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric). If the display is blank or
a
is displayed, it may be necessary to calibrate the scale
before continuing. Refer to Section 5, Calibration, for calibration
procedures.
Remote Scale Display. Check to verify that 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for met-
ric) is displayed, then place an item on the weighing platter. Ver-
ify that the display shows a weight and that the yellow LED goes
out. Remove the item and observe that Remote Scale Display
shows 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) and that the yellow LED is
On.
5. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the
power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner’s
connector panel.
After you have verified that the scanner and scale (if present) are com-
pletely functional, continue with the following procedures to complete the
installation.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-19
'LDJQRVWLFꢀ0RGHV
Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or
scale diagnostic tests, as well as verify the scanner’s ability to read bar
codes.
6FDQQHUꢀ'LDJQRVWLFꢀ0RGH
While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is
allowed, permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes
while troubleshooting problems. Under normal operation, the scanner
stores label data, awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host. When
the scanner is not connected to a host, it may read and store only up to
two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing the memory).
This mode of operation removes this limitation.
To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Volume/Tone
the scanner will first sound three tones, wait a few seconds, then sound six
rapid tones; after which you should immediately release the button.
1
While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, identification numbers for interface
type, firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scan-
ner’s 7-segment FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) display. This is useful infor-
mation for field diagnostics. See Figure 4-1 for the location of the display.
For example, if the dual cable RS-232 interface (type 05) were enabled,
5593, the following would be shown (slowly, with blanking between each
of the items):
IF-05 r96-1234 r96-5593.
To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the unit or press and
hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner.
See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Section 3 for more information
about unit resets.
1. A listing of scanner interface identification numbers is available in Section 6, under the topic,
Interface Type.
2-20
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ'LDJQRVWLFꢀ0RGH
To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode, press the Scale Zero Push Button for
approximately four seconds. Six rapid tones will be sounded, indicating
the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic Mode.
The Remote Display will flash a ‘1’ across the display while the dignostic
routine is being run. When diagnostics are completed successfully, the dis-
play will indicate that the unit has passed the diagnostic test by displaying
PASS
. Next, the display shows a listing of how many times the unit
the number of times the scale has been calibrated. Next, the unit will dis-
play where x is the number of times the scale has been zeroed.
where x equals
c
XXX
XXXX
Zero
Finally, all segments will be displayed in the form of:
visual verification of display function.
-18.8.88
If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully, the scanner will
sound a series of tones and the Remote Display will show an error code.
Turn to Section 4, Problem Isolation for a description of error codes.
Press the Scale Zero Push Button once more to reset the unit and exit
Scale Diagnostic Mode. See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Section 3
for more information about unit resets.
&DEOHVꢀ;ꢀ&RQQHFWLRQV
Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scan-
ner and scanning-scale are:
•
•
Ensure that cables are not pinched, kinked or pierced.
Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical
motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
•
Cables can drop directly from their connectors on the scanner, or,
(see Figure 2-10).
Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time. It is a good
practice to always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plug-
ging it into the AC receptacle. The procedures titled, Set-Up, provided
later in this section will instruct you to connect the power cord at that
time. Figure 2-10 illustrates the basic cable routing scheme.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-21
Figure 2-10. Cable Routing
POS Terminal, Printer &
Cash Drawer
Remote
Display
Keyboard
Alternate
Cable
Routing
Scanner
AC Power
Switch
(recommended)
Remote Scale
Display Cable
(optional
Scanner
Interface
Cable
Scanner/Scale)
AC/DC
Power
Supply
Scale
Interface
Cable
(Scanner/Scale)
2-22
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 2-11 provides physical dimensions for the AC/DC Adapter (part
number 8-0599).
Figure 2-11. Physical Measurements: AC/DC Adapter
2.3"
(5.8 cm)
5.51"
(14 cm)
3.1"
(7.8 cm)
5HPRWHꢀ6FDOHꢀ'LVSOD\ꢀ3ODFHPHQWꢎ,QVWDOODWLRQ
When installing the optional Remote Scale Display, consider both the cus-
tomer’s viewing angle and the amount of daily ambient light conditions
anticipated at this installation site. Figure 2-12 shows available adjustment
for the display head.
/LJKWLQJꢀ&RQVLGHUDWLRQV
The display will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other
very strong light sources. Light interference will not be a factor in most
installations.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-23
9LHZLQJꢀ$QJOH
The optimum viewing angle is directly facing the customer. To ensure that
the display is easily readable for the majority of your customers, the dis-
play should be approximately 48 to 60” (122 to 152 cm) from the floor.
Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper posi-
tioning of scale displays used in retail trade.
NOTE
Figure 2-12. Remote Scale Display
0.00
lb
CAPACITY / CAPACITE - 30 X .01 lb / 15 x .005 kg
2-24
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
The connector at the Remote Scale Display end is secured with a rubber
band during shipping to prevent damage to the “locking tabs” (see
Figure 2-14). After routing the cable, remove this rubber band before the
cable end connecting to the Remote Scale Display head. Failure to remove
the band will keep the connector from latching properly when it is connected
to Remote Scale Display port.
NOTE
3ODFLQJꢀDQGꢀ,QVWDOOLQJꢀWKHꢀ5HPRWHꢀ6FDOHꢀ'LVSOD\
1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display
based on your counter design, the viewing angle and lighting con-
siderations discussed previously. Reference Figure 2-13 for the
2. Use the template provided in Figure 2-15 to mark locations of the
mounting screw and cable routing holes. The mounting screw
holes are on 3 3/8” (8.57 cm) centers. The cable can either be
3
routed through a /4” (19 mm) diameter hole directly under the
mounting base or through the cutout in the back of the base (see
Figure 2-14).
3. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate
diameter for your mounting screws or bolts.
4. Drill the cable routing hole using a 3/4” (19 mm) drill bit
(optional).
It may be necessary to shorten the stalk that supports the display head so
that the display is installed at eye level.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-25
Figure 2-13. Physical Measurements: Remote Display
5.6"
14.2 cm
2.75"
7.0 cm
0.00
lb
.005 kg
CAPACITY
/
CAPACITE
-
30
X
.01 lb
/
15
x
1.0"
2.5 cm
Minimum
5.3"
(13.5 cm)
Maximum
11.5"
(29.2 cm)
3.375"
0.953 cm
1.5"
3.8 cm
4.5"
31.6 cm
5. Cut the stalk to fit your installation (if required).
6. Route the cable through the base/stalk so that you can plug the
connector into the display head.
7. Remove the rubber band from the connector and attach the con-
nector to the display head.
8. Slip the display head onto the stalk/base.
9. Feed the entire remaining length of the Remote Scale Display
interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assem-
bled Remote Scale Display can be positioned over the mounting
screw holes.
10. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of
the Remote Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the
interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the
checkstand.
2-26
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 2-14. Remote Scale Display Components.
Mounting
Example
Display Head
Cable end
after
Display Stalk
rubberband
is removed.
Cable
Connector
Display Base
(optional
Interface
Cable
cable
routing)
Figure 2-15. Remote Scale Display Mounting Template
4 1/2" (11.4 cm)
3 3/8" (8.57 cm)
3/4"
(1.9 cm)
FRONT
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-27
&KDQJLQJꢀ:HLJKLQJꢀ0RGHV
Your scanning-scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds
or kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was
specified when you ordered your scanning-scale. If you need to change
from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa, call technical support.
You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country’s requirements
by observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate mea-
surement symbol (lb or kg) when the power-up Selftest is completed.
Any time the scale weighing mode is changed, the scale must be
re-calibrated before commercial use.
LEGAL NOTE
6HWꢃ8Sꢀ;ꢀ,QVWDOODWLRQ
These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already pre-
pared your checkstand to receive the scanner or scanning-scale. If you have
not already made the counter cutout and routed power and interface
cables, do so now as described in the previous instructions. If your check-
stand has been prepared, proceed as follows:
6HWꢃXS
1. Place the unit on the checkstand next to the counter cutout.
2. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner
and scale interface cable(s), and Remote Scale Display cable
(optional) to the scanner. Some POS terminals require two inter-
face cables; one for the scanner interface and one for the scale
interface. Refer to Figure 2-16 for cable connection locations.
If you have a scanner with no scale, there will be only one interface cable
to the POS terminal.
3. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end
down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT
plug the power cord in at this time.
2-28
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 2-16. Connecting Cables to the Scanner/Scale
0.00
POS Terminal
Remote Display
Aux. Port
Scale Host
EAS Interlock
Power
POS TERMINAL
· Label Data
· Scale Data (for
single cable interfaces)
· Application Download
(where appropriate)
REMOTE DISPLAY AUXILIARY PORT
SCALE HOST
EAS INTERLOCK
POWER
· Test Port
· On Screen
Drives Remote Display
Scale Data (dual
cable scanner/scale)
· Provides Good Read
output to enable EAS
antenna RF output
· Provides signal to
drive external speaker
AC Brick Input
OR
Power off Terminal
(POT) Brick Input
Programming (OSP)
· Application Download
· RS-232 Handheld
Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232
Label Data Output
Connection to
this port is
Optional
Models with scale
only
Connection to
this port is
Optional
Dual cable units only.
(Scale connection may
be handled through
POS Terminal port)
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-29
,QVWDOODWLRQ
DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet).
2. Remove the All Weighs™ Platter to gain access to the lift han-
dles. Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 2-17 and gently lift it
from the scanner. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you
may find it easier to grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in
Figure 2-17b.
Figure 2-17. Removing the All Weighs™ Platter
a
OR
Obstruction
b
Vertical Bezel
2-30
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3. Hook the fingers of both hands into the lift handles located along
the insides of the scanner walls, just above the debris chutes as
shown in Figure 2-18. DO NOT attempt to lift the unit using
the plastic edges, scale frame, or any features other than the lift
handles.
4. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of
the cables are pinched, pierced or crimped.
5. Re-install the All Weighs™ Platter and verify that it is flush or
just below flush with the countertop. This is necessary to provide
smooth scanning from either direction. Make adjustments as
needed to align the platter with the counter by moving support
rails up or down, or consider installing screws in positions that
will allow their use in adjusting the unit’s position.
Failure to install a scanning-scale in a stable and level position will inhibit
weighing, calibration and zeroing operations. The platter MUST make unob-
structed contact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation.
NOTE
6. Once installation is complete, proceed with the Operational Veri-
fication procedures that follow.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-31
6\VWHPꢀ3RZHUꢃ8Sꢀ5HFDS
The System Power-Up procedure may vary depending upon the require-
ments of your POS system. It is generally a good practice to power-down
(switch off) all equipment prior to connecting cables. Check with your
System Supervisor and/or refer to your POS terminal manual for proper
power-down and power-up procedures and interface requirements when
connecting any peripheral device.
If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system,
follow these steps.
1. Power-down the POS terminal.
2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner.
3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS ter-
minal. This connection may use one or two cables depending
upon your POS terminal interface.
4. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanning-
scale and make any connections to optional equipment, such as
EAS or a handheld scanner.
5. Power-up the scanner or scanning-scale by connecting the power
Selftest routine (10 seconds maximum).
6. Power-up the POS terminal.
7. Verify that both scanning and weighing data are properly com-
municated between the scanner and your POS system. (Weigh
and scan a few items.) If problems are encountered, refer to
Section 4, Problem Isolation.
8. You have now completed installation and system integration of
the scanner or scanning-scale. At this point, the scale must be cal-
ibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your
state and/or local requirements. Refer to Section 5, Calibration,
for calibration procedures.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ2-33
127(6
2-34
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6HFWLRQ ꢄ
2SHUDWLRQꢀDQGꢀ0DLQWHQDQFH
The information contained in this section describes how to operate and
weighing, re-zeroing the scale, removing the top cover and cleaning the
upper and lower windows.
6FDQQLQJꢀ,WHPV
To scan items using the scanner, slide or push them through the scan zone
as shown in Figure 3-1. The scanner will work equally well with either a
left-to-right or right-to-left motion through the scan zone. There is no
need to reorient an item’s bar code since the scanner can “see” the left,
right, front and back side, as well as the top and bottom of an item.
“Limited Scanning Mode” is entered by default by interfaces such as USB and
IBM until a Point Of Sale (POS) terminal enables scanning. Labels are “chirped”
while in this mode.
NOTE
Figure 3-1. Scan Zone
Vertical Window
Scan Zone
Horizontal Window
Scan Zone
Note that
eyes...
...indicate what the
scanner "sees."
Top Down
Checker Side
Scan Zone
Scan Zone
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-1
3URSHUꢀ6FDQQLQJꢀ7HFKQLTXH
The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhance-
ments for Point-Of-Sale (POS) scanning. To take advantage of these
advancements:
Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency:
•
•
Move the product across the horizontal window (See Figure 3-1).
Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and
bottom, don’t favor either the horizontal or vertical scan win-
dows. Keep items in their natural orientation.
•
Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up. By
avoiding any gripping, twisting and rotation of your hands and
wrists, you can prevent repetitive motion injuries. This technique
also relieves you from lifting possibly thousands of pounds per
day.
•
Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work
equally between hands.
•
•
Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand
movements.
•
•
Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages; avoid “flipping”
or rotating the items during scanning.
Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is
located.
3-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3URSHUꢀ:HLJKLQJꢀ7HFKQLTXH
1. The L-shaped All-Weighs™ platter allows you to place items
anywhere on its surface, including leaning against its vertical sec-
tion, to be weighed accurately. The raised “Produce Rail” also
provides a convenient way to ensure items do not rest on the
counter or other non-weighing surfaces. (Reference Figure 3-2.)
It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be
accurately recorded.
NOTE
Figure 3-2. L-Shaped Platter & Item Placement
Produce Rail
2. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data
as described in your POS system instructions. Item weight is dis-
played on the Remote Display and/or the host display.
3. Remove the item from the weigh platter.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-3
2SHUDWLRQDOꢀ&RQWUROV
The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls. Turn to that appendix for
full details.
2SHUDWLRQDOꢀ0RGHV
The scanner or scanner/scale features a number of modes that are impor-
tant to both the user and the system support personnel. These modes can
be combined into three groups: pre-operational, operational; and addi-
tional functions. The following text describes these modes, what they
mean, and how and when they are seen.
3RZHUꢃ8Sꢎ6HOIWHVWꢀ;ꢀ3UHꢃ2SHUDWLRQꢀ
Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed
before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the
lamps indicating the scanner and/or scale are ready for operation. These
steps include Power-Up Selftest, Error Reporting, and Operational Con-
figuration.
3RZHUꢃ8Sꢎ6HOIWHVWꢀ
Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner’s software
immediately begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are func-
the functions of the scanner, scale, remote scale display and interface prior
to indicating that it is ready for operation.
A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature. See the topic
Power-up Beep Control in the Programming section of this manual.
NOTE
3-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
(UURUꢀ5HSRUWLQJ
advance to Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the
unit to sound a long, low tone and/or display an error message on the 7-
segment display indicating where the failure occurred. These messages are
coded to assist the repair technician in identifying the failed component.
If an error is indicated, make note of it and contact your supervisor or
technical support representative. A table containing descriptions of these
error codes is included in Section 4, Problem Isolation.
1
If a non-fatal error is detected (such as the loss of one of the two lasers),
the unit will sound a long, low tone and display a number on the 7-seg-
ment display. The unit will advance to Normal Operating Mode, but per-
formance may be affected until a correction or repair is made.
2SHUDWLRQDOꢀ&RQILJXUDWLRQ
Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if
configured to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state.
The scanner or scanner/scale will automatically load your specific interface
settings which are required to communicate with the host system. There
are two conditions that must be met before the unit can enter Operating
Mode:
•
No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in
this state. Progress is halted until the label has been removed,
thereby ensuring that no extraneous bar code data is send to the
host.
•
If your scanner has a scale, the scale cannot be in motion (usually
caused by excessive vibration in the checkstand) for this test to
succeed. A “Scale in Motion” status will be indicated by display-
ing a period and the applicable weight unit (lb
kg ) that is selected.
or
.
lb
.
kg
•
The scale must be able to “capture” zero weight. The
display will be seen if there is a weight on the platter
at power-up. Removing the weight or pressing the Scale Zero
Push Button should allow the scale to find zero.
1. Scanner behavior under non-fatal error conditions is configurable. See Section 6, Programming
for more details.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-5
•
When the scanner or scanner/scale completes its Selftest success-
fully, it emits a tone (when configured to do so) and enters Oper-
ating Mode.
2SHUDWLQJꢀ0RGH
Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning and weighing)
and Sleep Mode. These two modes are most commonly observed by the
user/operator.
1RUPDOꢀ2SHUDWLRQꢀ
This condition is indicated by the green light being on dim and steady.
For scanner/scale models, the yellow light indicates that the scale senses a
weight of zero on the platter. If you have a scanner without scale model,
the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for scanning.
Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be pro-
grammed to operate in the standard manner described above.
NOTE
Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown
sequence. If there is no activity during a preset period of time (also called
1
time-out ), the unit will shut off the laser and/or motor in order to pro-
long the life of the electrical and mechanical components. Once the scan-
ner has timed out, it enters Sleep Mode.
6OHHSꢀ0RGHꢀ
After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the laser
and/or motor automatically turns off (goes to sleep). This state is called
Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light (blinking
at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press anywhere on the weigh
platter (scanner/scale models only), press the Volume Selection switch or
any of these signals as a wake-up call and instantly return to Normal
Operation.
1. “Timeout” and “Sleep Mode” time delays are programmable features that can be selected through
use of the programming labels included in Section 6, Programming.
3-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$GGLWLRQDOꢀ)XQFWLRQV
Additional scanner and scale functions include programming, running
scanner or scale diagnostics, initiating a reset, zeroing the scale, and cali-
brating the scale.
3URJUDPPLQJ
When your scanner or scanner/scale is shipped from the factory it is con-
ration information for any reason, Section 6, Programming, contains spe-
cial bar code labels for changing the unit’s settings.
'LDJQRVWLFꢀ0RGH
Refer to Section 2, Diagnostic Modes for details about running scanner and
scale diagnostics. Turn to Section 4, Problem Isolation, for a description of
error codes resulting from diagnostics.
6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDOHꢀ5HVHW
The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner/
scale models. As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary
to reset the electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset
command to the scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has
been switched off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on.
Reset can also be used to initiate and run the unit’s internal Selftest rou-
tine.
Pressing and holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately
eight seconds initiates a reset, which is sounded by a rapid number of
beeps. If the motor had been spinning, the lamps will blink while the
motor spins down. At that point, the motor will spin back up and the
scanner will continue to run the Selftest diagnostics. For more informa-
tion, see the topic, Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation earlier in this sec-
tion.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-7
6FDOHꢀ$GMXVWPHQWV
The scale allows two user adjustments: zeroing and calibration. The first,
and most frequently performed, is ‘zeroing’ the scale. This operation resets
the scale’s “at rest” reading to zero which must be within the range of - 0.2
pounds (- 1.25 grams) to +0.6 pounds (0.27kg) since the last calibration.
While the ‘at rest’ reading remains within the zero range, the scale will
automatically adjust itself to true zero. The scale also automatically zeros
itself on power-up if the weight present on the scale is within these defined
limits.
=HURLQJꢀWKHꢀ6FDOH
The zeroing operation may be performed by checkers and other store per-
sonnel. Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Push Button should return
the scale to Normal Operation. If the zero point moves out of the zero
range due to debris accumulation or other causes, pressing the Scale Zero
Push Button will not reset the zero point. In this case the weigh platter
must be cleaned, debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must be recal-
ibrated.
1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/
scale.
2. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. (See Figure 1-1).
1
3. The Zero light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb
(0.000 kg). If it does not, see Section 4, Problem Isolation.
4. You have completed the scale zeroing function.
&DOLEUDWLQJꢀWKHꢀ6FDOH
The second adjustment, calibration, defines and sets a standard reference
weight range against which all product weights are compared. If your scale
is set for weighing in pounds, this range is 0 - 30 pounds, and, if your scale
is set for weighing in kilograms, the range is 0 - 15 kilograms. The scale
must be calibrated upon initial installation, whenever the scale cannot be
zeroed, when the scale diagnostics indicate a calibration error, when the
weighing measure (pounds or kilograms) is changed, or when the scale
module has been replaced.
1. Zero light operation is configurable.
3-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Normally, once the scale has been calibrated, the calibration must be veri-
fied and/or approved by a local regulatory body. In many areas of the
United States, the scale calibration switch must be sealed before being
placed into service. Consult the agency responsible for regulating weigh-
ing devices in your area to ensure that you are meeting all legal and regula-
tory requirements. Section 5, Calibration, describes the calibration
sequence and verification process.
Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to
the Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed. Break-
ing the seal may legally render the scale inoperable until it has been recerti-
fied and a new seal attached. Consult your local regulations before
removing the calibration seal if you are unsure of the legal requirements.
Although the scale will physically continue to weigh products, a broken
seal may require recertification by a proper authority as designated by your
local laws.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-9
2SHUDWLRQDOꢀ0DLQWHQDQFH
The scanner or scanner/scale will provide dependable service for many
years. The following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or
scanner/scale operating at peak performance.
Cleaning the Weigh Platter and Scan Windows. Clean the exterior sur-
faces of the horizontal and vertical scan windows at least twice daily with a
nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free
cleaning tissues. The textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be
cleaned using the same cleaning agents.
Cleaning the Air Gap/Debris Chutes & Drip Rail. Daily, clear the debris
chutes between the platter and the outer housing. Most items can be
cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a thin stiff object like a
credit card along all sides of the weighing surface. If necessary, remove the
top cover to clear the debris chutes and drip rail.
3-10
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
9HUWLFDOꢀ6FDQꢀ:LQGRZꢀ5HSODFHPHQW
The Vertical Scan Window enclosed in the All Weighs™ Platter is a
replaceable part. Follow these instructions to remove and replace the win-
dow:
To remove the Vertical Scan Window:
1. Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 3-3 and gently lift it from
the scanner.
Figure 3-3. Platter Removal
a
OR
Obstruction
b
Vertical Bezel
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-11
2. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to
grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in Figure 3-3b.
Use caution to avoid damage to the now exposed horizontal and vertical
scan windows. If cleaning of these windows is necessary, use a nonabrasive,
mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tis-
sues and take care to avoid scratching these windows (damage to the win-
dows can degrade scanning performance).
NOTE
3. The vertical scan window is held in place by two tabs each on its
top and bottom edges. To remove it, carefully push out on the top
as shown in Figure 3-4 and lift it out. Carefully dispose of any
damaged glass.
Figure 3-4. Vertical Scan Window Removal/Replacement
Vertical Scan Window
3-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
4. Fully seat the new vertical scan window into the window channel
within its bottom retention tabs. Tilt the window in to engage the
two tabs at the top of the retainer and carefully snap the window
to secure it in place.
5. Clean both sides of the new vertical scan window using a paper
towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-
based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
6. Re-install the platter. Vertical scan window replacement is now
complete.
+RUL]RQWDOꢀ6FDQꢀ:LQGRZꢀ5HSODFHPHQWꢀꢈ:5*ꢉ
Wear Resistant Glass (WRG) horizontal scan windows are replaceable and
can be removed and replaced following the instructions below.
in place. Do not attempt to remove Sapphire glass from the platter.
NOTE
1. Remove the All Weighs™ Platter from the scanner as shown in
Figure 3-3.
2. Turn the platter upside down on a clean, dry surface and remove
the four screws shown in Figure 3-5. Retain all screws for later re-
installation.
3. Once the vertical bezel is freed from the platter, the WRG win-
dow can be slid from its channel as shown. Carefully dispose of
any damaged glass.
4. Slide a new WRG window fully into the channel.
5. Re-install the vertical bezel using the original four screws.
6. Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or
lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass
cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
7. Re-install the platter. WRG window replacement is now com-
plete.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ3-13
6HFWLRQ ꢅ
3UREOHPꢀ,VRODWLRQ
In the event of a suspected functional problem, use the troubleshooting
references provided in this section. This useful information will help you
to identify and resolve the cause of the problem.
The scanner/scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner or
scale problem occurs. The unit may:
•
•
•
•
emit a series of tones
light the 7-segment (FRU status) display
flash the Green and/or Yellow LEDs
display error codes on the Remote Display (if installed)
Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational
tests and Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the fol-
lowing pages.
3RZHUꢃ8Sꢀ6HOIWHVW
The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be suc-
cessfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation.
This pre-operational period is the time between power-up and normal
operation during which the motor comes up-to-speed and software, firm-
ware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all subsystems
are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode (VLD).
Refer to the Section 3 subsection titled, Operational Modes for a more
detailed description of this and other scanner and scale modes.
2SHUDWLRQDOꢀ7HVWV
These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and
Sleep Mode. Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections and
the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally. If a problem
is detected at any time, a long, low tone is sounded, an error code is shown
on the 7-segment display, and operation may be halted. If you press the
Volume/Tone Push Button at that time, a series of tones will be sounded
that matches the error code displayed.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ4-1
'LDJQRVWLFꢀ7HVWV
See Section 2, Diagnostic Modes, for details about running diagnostic tests
for the scanner and/or scale. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics,
the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The
remainder of this section describes these failure indications and includes
troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem.
'LDJQRVWLFꢀ3URFHGXUHV
Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that
operate as a system. Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused
by either the scanner, scale, POS terminal or communication links
between them, these troubleshooting flowcharts focus on these compo-
nents. Additionally, the optional Remote Scale Display, AC/DC Power
Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in this section.
The flowcharts provided in this section walk you through a diagnostic
process that will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the correc-
tive action required. Since internal scanner and scale components cannot
be replaced by an operator or installer, most functional errors will require
the assistance of a trained technical support person. However, if the prob-
lem is caused by faulty cable, power supply or remote display, you can fix
the problem by replacing the defective component and complete the
installation.
4-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
(UURUꢀ&RGHV
If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a long low tone (for three
seconds) and alternately flash its LEDs, indicating a failure. When this
occurs, press the Volume/Tone Push button to display the error code on
the 7-segment display (refer to Figure 4-1). If it is configured to do so, the
scanner will also sound a series of beeps corresponding to the error code.
The table below describes what these codes mean and what action should
be taken for each.
When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections
first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ4-3
7DEOH ꢅꢃꢂꢏꢀ(UURUꢀ&RGHVꢀDQGꢀ&RUUHFWLYHꢀ$FWLRQ
Error
Code
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
No POS interface has been selected (Null interface). See the topic,
Interface Type, in Section 6 to select the required interface using
programming bar codes.
0
Blinking
Configuration
See Section 6, Programming, for details about configuring the scan-
ner using programming bar codes.
1
Configuration Error
2
3
4
Interface Board
Motor
Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
Call technical support personnel.
Horizontal Lasera
Vertical Lasera
Digital Board
5
6
Call technical support personnel.
Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
See the topic Scale Error Reporting in this section for problem
identification and corrective actions.
7
8
Scale
Connect the Remote Display. If necessary, replace display or cable.
Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using the program-
ming procedures described in Section 6.
Remote Display
A
C
Button Module
Call technical support personnel.
Scale Calibration
Proceed to scale calibration procedure.
Decimal
Point
3.3 V Present
If not lit, call technical support personnel.
a. If only one laser is non-functional, the scanner may continue to work (this is a configurable feature);
however, the 7-segment display will show the error code indicating the failed laser. If both lasers have
failed, the 7-segment display will display either a 4 or a 5, and the scanner will cease to function until
serviced. No alternate blinking of lamps will occur if only one laser has failed.
4-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ(UURUꢀ5HSRUWLQJ
Scale diagnostics uses the Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp
to communicate specific scale failures. The following chart shows the
Remote Display messages, the Scale Status lamp indication, the problem
that the scale is experiencing and what action should be taken. When
troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first
before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.
7DEOH ꢅꢃꢁꢏꢀ6FDOHꢀ(UURUꢀ5HSRUWLQJ
Remote
Display
Scale Status
Lamp
Problem
Description
Action Required
Check for stable installation. Change
Too much motion at power- scale motion filter using the labels
Flash, pause, 1 blink,
long pause, repeat
sequence.
E _1
up.
found in Section 6; restart. If problem
persists, scale may require calibration.
Flash, pause, 2
blinks, long pause,
repeat sequence.
Call technical support personnel. Re-
calibrate; restart; recertify (if required).
E__2
E__3
E__4
E__5
Calibration lost.
Flash, pause, 3
blinks, long pause,
repeat sequence.
Scale communication lost.
Internal scanner/scale prob-
lem.
Call technical support personnel;
report error.
Flash, pause, 4
blinks, long pause,
repeat sequence.
Call technical support personnel;
report error.
Scale module failure.
Flash, pause, 5
blinks, long pause,
repeat sequence.
Call technical support personnel;
report error.
Internal software fault.
Other Scale Reporting
- Check debris chutes.
Cannot zero at power- up or - Verify that the weigh platter moves
weight remains on scale for freely.
more than 4 minutes or
weight has not returned to
zero between POS weight
requestsa.
- Remove item(s) from scale
- Press Scale Zero Push Button
- for more information.
- 0 -
Off
- If the scale still fails to zero, recali-
brate the scale.
a. This is a configurable feature.
4-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
)ORZFKDUWV
The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to
identify and troubleshoot problems with your system.
Figure 4-2. Problem Isolation: Start
For units using an AC/DC adapter, verify that...
1. AC power cord is connected to a functional AC outlet.
2. IEC connectors are firmly connected.
3. DC power cord is firmly connected to scanner.
If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the
START
connected at both ends.
Terminal POT), verify that the I/F cable is securely
Power-up
Scanner power-up is signified by any or
all of the following:
- Facet wheel shows movement
- Lasers turn on
- Status LED(s) turn on
Power
Supply
Magellan
- Speaker sounds tone(s)
- Remote display shows message
- A single red dot is visible on the 7-
segment display
NO
Check these
Have you
checked the
power
connections
?
potential problems:
- AC power cord
- AC/DC adaptor
- AC outlet
Does
the scanner
power-up
?
NO
NO
YES
Flashing Green LED
If the Green LED is flashing slowly, the
scanner is most likely in Sleep Mode.
Press and release the Volume/Tone
Push Button or wave your hand in front
of the vertical window to "wake-up" the
scanner.
A flashing Green LED can also mean
the scanner has been disabled by the
POS terminal. To exit this mode, cycle
power or have the terminal re-enable
the scanner.
YES
Ensure the Green LED is
enabled via pro-
gramming bar codes.
Is the
Green LED
Is the
Green LED
NO
Lit
?
Lit
?
YES
YES
Selftest Failure
If the scanner fails its Selftest, the
following takes place:
- Speaker sounds a tone at the lowest
value for approx. 3 seconds.
- Green and Yellow LEDs flash on and
off alternately.
- 7-segment display shows a code (1 to
C) to indicate the failure.
Call Tech Support
Does
the scanner
pass Selftest
?
NO
NO
Go to Selftest
flowchart
Consult the Selftest flowchart if you're
unsure the unit has passed Selftest.
YES
Will the
scanner read
bar codes
reliably
YES
Does the
scale weigh
correctly
?
NO
Go to Scale
flowchart
Go to Poor/No
Reading flowchart
?
YES
Other Problems?
Call Tech Support
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ4-7
Figure 4-3. Problem Isolation: Selftest
SELFTEST
START
Scan the Factory
Does the
7-segment
Does the
Does the
7-segment
YES Defaults bar code in
YES
NO
7-segment
Section 6 to enable the
display show
default configuration
1.
display show
display show
0
?
1.
?
file. Restart the unit.
?
NO
NO
YES
No interface selected
(Null Interface).
Select an interface.
Does the
YES
7-segment
display show
Call Tech Support
2. or 3.
?
NO
Error code 4. indicates a failed
horizontal VLDM (laser) assembly,
while 5. indicates a failed vertical
1
VLDM. If configured to do so , the
Does the
7-segment
display show
4. or 5.
YES
YES
YES
YES
scanner will remain operational
with only one of these lasers until
the unit can be serviced. If both
lasers have failed, the unit will no
longer function.
?
NO
Does the
7-segment
display show
7 or A.
Call Tech Support
?
NO
Does the
7-segment
display show
Go to Remote Display
flowchart
8.
?
For this error, the Remote Display
may also show -0- or an error (E__#).
Does the
7-segment
display show
C.
Go to Scale flowchart
?
NO
1 Refer to the feature Laser Failure
Mode in Section 6.
Unit passes Selftest
4-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 4-4. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading
Have you verified that
all scan windows are clean
and scratch-free?
POOR/NO READING
START
Before proceeding, verify that
bar code samples presented
to scanner are of good quality
and a symbology the scanner
can read.
Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by
holding the Volume/Tone Push
Button for 4 seconds (until first 3,
and then 6 rapid tones are sounded)
then release. Scan a known-good
bar code.
A good read is
signified by one
flash of the Green
LED and a single
beep1.
Does the
scanner read
the bar code
satisfactorily
?
NO
Call Tech Support
YES
Reset the scanner by
holding down the
Volume/Tone Push Button
for 8 seconds.
If unexpected data
is being sent from
the host to the
scanner, consider
enabling the
programmable
feature Ignore Host
Commands to
debug the system.
Does the
Does the
YES
YES
scanner pass
the data to
the POS
?
scanner read
satisfactorily
?
DONE
NO
NO
Go to No Transmit to
POS flowchart
Verify programmable
parameters using the
Does the
information and programming
bar codes provided in Section
6. Check bar code symbology
options and other configurable
features.
YES
scanner read
satisfactorily
?
DONE
NO
Troubleshoot
the host or call
Tech Support.
1
Green and Yellow LEDs and beeper indications are configurable
features. Behavior may vary from that described here.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ4-9
Figure 4-5. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS
NO TRANSMIT TO POS
START
Check the interface (I/F)
cable connections. If
possible, retest the
system using a known-
good I/F cable.
Verify programmable
parameters using the
information and programming
bar codes provided in Section
6. Check interface and I/F
options, inactive symbologies
and other configurable
features.
Does the
scanner read
satisfactorily
?
YES
DONE
NO
Does the
scanner pass
the data to
the POS
?
NO
Troubleshoot
the host or call
Tech Support.
YES
DONE
4-10
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 4-6. Problem Isolation: Scale
If this is a new installation,
make sure any foam packing
pieces have been removed
from the scale cavity before
proceeding. Lift off the platter
to verify, then set the platter
back into position.
SCALE START
View the Remote
Display and/or the
Yellow scale status LED
for the scale error code.
Reference the topic,
Scale Error Reporting in
Section 4 for more
information.
Call Tech Support
YES
Is the
motion filter
at its maximum
setting
Is
YES
NO
problem
fixed
?
DONE
?
-0-
shown on
RemoteDisplay/
- Check for debris under platter.
- Verify that the weigh platter
moves freely.
YES
NO
Increase the scale
Yellow
LED off
?
- Remove item(s) from scale.
- Press Scale Zero Button
- If the scale still fails to zero,
recalibrate the scale.
motion filter setting by
1. Reference Section 6
for more information.
NO
NO
E__1
shown on
Remote Display/
Yellow LED
Flash once
?
Problem is too much
motion at power-up.
Correct excess vibration
in counter if possible.
Is
YES
YES
problem
fixed
?
DONE
NO
NO
E__2
shown on
Remote Display/
Yellow LED
Flash twice
?
Problem is calibration
lost. Recalibrate the scale
using the procedures in
Section 5.
Will the
scale
calibrate
?
YES
YES
DONE
DONE
NO
For this error, the 7-segment
display may also show a 'C'.
E__3
Problem is scale
communication lost.
Verify cable connections
to/from the scale.
shown on
RemoteDisplay/
Yellow LED Flash
3 times
Is
problem
fixed
?
YES
YES
?
NO
NO
E__4 shown on Remote
Display/Yellow LED Flash
4 times. Problem is Scale
Load Cell failure.
Call Tech Support
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ4-11
Figure 4-7. Problem Isolation: Remote Display
Scanner-scale models that include
a Remote Display when shipped
from the factory, are configured
for use with the display. If you're
unsure of the settings for your
unit, contact Tech Support.
REMOTE DISPLAY
START
Is the
unit configured
for a Remote
Display
Use the programming bar
NO
codes in Section 6 to
enable operation using a
Remote Display.
?
YES
Verify that the Remote
Display cable is securely
attached to the external
Remote Display port and
reset the scanner.
Is the
NO
YES
problem
fixed
?
DONE
Re-connect using a
known-good Remote
Display. Reset the
scanner and retest.
Is the
problem
fixed
Is the
NO
YES
Replace the
Remote Display
problem
fixed
?
?
YES
NO
DONE
Call Tech Support
4-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6HFWLRQ ꢆ
&DOLEUDWLRQ
A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated. They are:
•
•
•
at initial installation of the scanner/scale
if the scale cannot be re-zeroed
if you change the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or
vice-versa
•
•
if diagnostics indicate a calibration error
the weigh module has been replaced
Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner/
scale will meet Weights and Measurement requirements.
Certification of the scanner/scale’s weighing apparatus is subject to
Federal, State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is
restricted to authorized government agencies and/or duly registered
agents thereof. Anytime a scale is calibrated, it should be properly
sealed with a lead and wire or paper seal before being placed into ser-
vice.
LEGAL NOTE
It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in
your area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before
removing any official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner/scale
into service.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-1
'HVFULSWLRQꢀRIꢀ&DOLEUDWLRQꢀ6HTXHQFH
The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for
weighing. This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set
(31.5-pounds) for calibration in pounds, (18.5-kilograms) for Metric.
Once calibration has been successfully completed, the scanner/scale uses
the certified weight as a reference for subsequent weighing activities.
These verification procedures follow the U.S. National Institute of Stan-
dards and Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench/counter scale
installations.
If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications, you must
calibrate the scanner/scale. Refer to the calibration procedures in this sec-
tion for the proper procedures.
You may be required by state and/or local regulations to have procedures
other than these performed by a certified technician or verification offi-
cial.
Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire
and lead seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your
local regulatory agency.
The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner/
scale from its installed position.
NOTE
The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibra-
tion process:
1
•
•
•
31.5 pound Field Standard Weight Set .
(English calibration only).
2
18.5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set .
(Metric calibration only).
Lead/Wire or Paper Seal (as required by law).
1. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a
combination of weights from this set. eg. 20 lbs may be made up of one 10.00 lb. weight and two
5.00 lb. weights.
2. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specific weights may be achieved by using a com-
bination of weights from this set. eg. 10 kgs. may be made up of one 5.00 kg. and five 1.00 kg.
weights.
5-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
0RWLRQꢀ7HVW
This test verifies that the scale will not ‘zero’ when the weighing surface of
the scanner/scale is in motion.
1
1. Verify that the Yellow LED is on and the Remote Display reads
0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one
hand and at the same time press and release the Zero Push Button
on the operator’s panel. The Yellow LED should turn Off and the
Remote Display should not display 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilo-
grams.
3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that
the Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds
or 0.000 kilograms.
$XWRPDWLFꢀ=HURꢀ6HWWLQJꢀ7HVW
This test verifies that the scanner/scale automatic zero setting mechanism
is operating correctly.
1. Place 0.007 pounds (4 grams for metric) on the center of the
weighing platform. The entire weight must be placed on the
weighing platform at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow
LED should go Off and the Remote Display should read 0.01
pounds (0.005 kilograms).
The scanner/scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re-zeros the
scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level; thus if all the
weight is not placed on the weighing surface at one time, the Yellow LED will
remain On and the Remote Display will read 0.00 pounds (0.000 kilograms).
When the weight is removed, the Yellow LED will turn off and the display will
NOTE
show a minus sign
scale.
. Press the Zero Push Button to re-zero the
.
lb
1. Yellow LED indications can be configured via feature programming and may not be enabled for
certain functions.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-3
$XWRPDWLFꢀ=HURLQJꢀLIꢀ6FDOHꢀLVꢀ8QGHUꢀ=HUR
The scanner/scale is equipped with a feature that automatically zeros the
scale if it has been under zero for five seconds. (See “Scale Automatic
Zeroing” on page 37.) Local requirements may require temporarily dis-
abling this feature during certification. For the most accurate weighing
function, it is recommended that the automatic zeroing feature be
enabled.
9HULILFDWLRQꢀRIꢀ$XWRPDWLFꢀ=HURLQJꢀLIꢀ6FDOHꢀLVꢀ
8QGHUꢀ=HUR
1. Place 0.1 lb (0.05kg) on the scale and press the Zero Push Button.
The Remote Display should read
(or
).
0.00kg
0.00lb
then, after five seconds, the display should read
kg).
(or
0.00lb
3UHSDULQJꢀWKHꢀ6FDQQHUꢎ6FDOHꢀIRUꢀ&DOLEUDWLRQ
1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable, secure and properly
installed. (Refer to Section 2, Site Preparation and Installation for
instructions on the proper installation of the scanner/scale).
2. Power-up the scanner/scale.
3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one
hour. If the scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at
least 15 minutes for acclimatization.
4. Before performing the calibration, the scanner/scale must be pre-
stressed with a weight of more than 30 pounds (15kg). With
on the weighing surface of the scale. The display should show an
underscore and three hyphens
weight indication.
, which is the over-
5. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that
there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/scale.
See Figure 2-3.
5-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&DOLEUDWLQJꢀWKHꢀ6FDOHꢀꢈ3RXQGVꢀ;ꢀ.LORJUDPVꢉ
1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been pre-
pared for this process by performing the preceding steps titled,
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration.
2. Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no
obstructions in the debris chutes.
3. Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access
cover and remove the cover. This seal may not be present if this is
the initial installation of the scanner/scale.
To protect static sensitive circuitry, follow Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) pro-
cedures when exposing internal scanner-scale components.
ESD ALERT
4. Locate the calibration switch access cover and remove the screw
that holds the cover in place. (See Figure 5-1).
5. Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner/scale
in Calibration Mode (See Figure 5-2). The scanner/scale will
sound a tone indicating that it is in Calibration Mode. If the
motor was spinning when you initiated Calibration Mode, the
motor will stop and the Yellow LED will begin flashing indicating
the scale is in Calibration Mode. The display will show the mes-
sage “ESCL” (empty scale).
6. Reinstall the weigh platter.
7. Press the Zero Push Button. The Yellow LED will go out for
approximately 10 seconds (or less) and the Remote Display will
alternately display
ready to proceed.
and
until the scale is
8. When the scale is ready, the Yellow LED will begin blinking again
and the display will show the message “Ad20 (add twenty
pounds)” or “Ad10 (add ten kilograms).” The scanner/scale will
also sound one tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two
tones for pounds. Place the correct weight (twenty pounds for cal-
ibration in pounds, or ten kilograms for metric calibration) from
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-5
the Field Standard Weight set on the center of the weighing area
and press the Zero Push Button again.
9. The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds
and the Remote Display will alternately display
until the scale is ready to proceed.
and
10. If the calibration was successful, the speaker sounds a single tone,
in the Remote Display.
11. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker will sound five
tones indicating a scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will
blink twice, strobe (fast blinks) and then continually repeat this
sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the Weigh Platter,
and repeat the procedure starting with step 8.
12. Press the Zero Push Button again to permanently store the cali-
bration data and exit Calibration Mode. You have completed the
calibration of the scanner/scale. The unit’s calibration must now
be verified as required by state and/or local weights and measures
regulations. The verification procedure must be performed to
assure that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements
You have completed the scale calibration procedure. You must now con-
tinue with the calibration verification tests to complete the scale’s calibra-
tion. If you are weighing in pounds, continue with the following
procedures to verify that the scale was successfully calibrated and that it
weighs properly. If you are weighing in kilograms, turn to the instructions
titled, Calibration Verification (Kilograms), later in this section.
5-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&DOLEUDWLRQꢀ9HULILFDWLRQꢀꢈ8ꢏ6ꢏꢀ3RXQGVꢉ
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required
to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures
follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44
guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or
local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or
verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:
•
•
•
•
•
Increasing-Load Test
Shift Test
Blanking Test
Decreasing-Load Test
Return to Zero Test
5-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,QFUHDVLQJꢃ/RDGꢀ7HVWꢀꢈ3KDVHꢀꢂꢉ
This test checks Scale operation with five, ten and fifteen pound weights.
1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at rest with nothing
on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of the weighing surface
and check that the display reads 5.00 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb.
4. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01.
Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).
6KLIWꢀ7HVW
The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh-
ing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 5-3
when performing this test.
1. Place and remove in succession, a fifteen-pound load on the cen-
ter of each of the four quadrants (A, B, C, and D in Figure 5-2) of
the scanner/scale’s weigh platter. Verify that a reading of between
14.99 and 15.01 lb registers under load and that the display
returns to 0.00 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of the weighing sur-
face, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the
Shift Test.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-9
,QFUHDVLQJꢃꢀ/RDGꢀ7HVWꢀꢈ3KDVHꢀꢁꢉ
After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load
Test using 20.0, 25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight.
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type
and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard setting.
For this test, continue to place weights in five pound increments only up to
the upper weight limit set for your scale.
NOTE
1. With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0 pounds in the center of
the weighing surface and check that the display reads between
19.99 and 20.01 lb.
2. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing sur-
face, increasing the load to 25.0 pounds and check that the dis-
play reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing sur-
face increasing the load to 30.0 pounds and check that the display
reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
%ODQNLQJꢀ7HVW
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability
has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.05 pounds over its maximum
upper weight limit is placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.51 pounds
on the scale. For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds,
place weights equaling 30.051 pounds.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ - - -).
This is the overweight indication.
The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at
any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit
plus 0.051 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-11
'HFUHDVLQJꢃ/RDGꢀ7HVW
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy
object is followed by a significantly smaller object.
1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify that the display
shows between 29.99 and 30.01 pounds.
If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 30 pounds, begin by plac-
ing weight equaling your upper limit setting.
NOTE
2. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale. Check that the
display shows between 19.99 and 20.01.
3. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale and check that the
scale reads 5.00 lb.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
5HWXUQꢀWRꢀ=HURꢀ7HVW
This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed success-
fully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Remove all weights from the scale
and verify that the scale reads 0.00 lb.
After completing this test, close the calibration access cover and seal per
local Weights and Measures requirements. This final step must agree with
the legal requirements of your state or local government.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing
in pounds.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and
install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a quali-
fied technician.
5-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&DOLEUDWLRQꢀ9HULILFDWLRQꢀꢈ.LORJUDPVꢉ
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required
to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures
follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44
guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or
local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or
verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:
•
•
•
•
•
Increasing-Load Test
Shift Test
Blanking Test
Decreasing-Load Test
Return to Zero Test
,QFUHDVLQJꢃ/RDGꢀ7HVWꢀꢈ3KDVHꢀꢂꢉ
This test checks Scale operation for increasing loads from 0.100 kg and
7.50 kg.
1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at rest with nothing
on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface
and check that the display reads 0.100 kg.
3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.300 kg.
4. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.500 kg.
5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.600 kg.
6. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.700 kg.
7. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.800 kg.
8. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 1.000 kg.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-13
9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg on the center of the
weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7.495
and 7.505 kg.
10. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).
6KLIWꢀ7HVWꢀꢈ0HWULFꢉ
The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh-
ing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 5-4
when performing this test.
1. Place and remove in succession, a 5.0 kilogram load on the center
of each of the four quadrants (A, B, C, and D in Figure 5-4) and
in the center of the scanner/scale’s weighing platform. Verify that
the display shows a reading of between 4.995 and 5.005 kg for
each quadrant/center test and that the display returns to 0.000
between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of
the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have
completed the Shift Test.
5-14
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Figure 5-4. European Shift Test (Metric)
A
C
B
D
CENTER
B
A
CENTER
D
C
,QFUHDVLQJꢃꢀ/RDGꢀ7HVWꢀꢈ3KDVHꢀꢁꢉ
After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load
Test using 10.00, 12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight.
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type
and may not necessarily be set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard set-
ting. For this test, continue to place weights in 2.50 kilgram increments only
up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
NOTE
1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and
check that the display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg.
2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing
surface and check that the display reads between 12.490 kg and
12.510 kg.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-15
3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing
surface and check that the display reads between 14.990 kg and
15.010 kg.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
5. You have completed phase two of the increasing load test.
%ODQNLQJꢀ7HVW
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability
has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.82 over its maximum upper
weight limit is placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on
the weigh platter. For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilo-
grams, place weights equaling 15.82 kilograms.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens ( _ - - -).
This is the overweight indication.
The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at
any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit
plus 0.82 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE
5-16
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
'HFUHDVLQJꢃ/RDGꢀ7HVW
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy
object is followed by a significantly smaller object.
1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms.
If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms, begin by
placing weight equaling your upper limit setting plus 0.8 kilograms.
NOTE
2. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that
the display shows between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms.
3. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from the scale and check
that the scale reads 1.000 kg.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
5HWXUQꢀWRꢀ=HURꢀ7HVW
This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed success-
fully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Without any weight on the weigh
platter, verify that the scale reads 0.000 kg.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing
in kilograms.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and
install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a quali-
fied technician.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ5-17
127(6
5-18
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6HFWLRQ ꢇ
3URJUDPPLQJ
,QWURGXFWLRQꢀWRꢀ/DEHOꢀ3URJUDPPLQJ
The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you
to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner (scan-
ner/scale). To ensure full compatibility and proper function, use only the
programming bar codes in this manual and other product-specific publi-
cations to program scanner features.
This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all
levels to find the information needed to understand and configure fea-
tures. The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go
from here.
8QGHUVWDQGLQJꢀWKHꢀ%DVLFV
If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code
labels, you should review the first few pages of this section to familiarize
yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any
changes to your configuration.
,QWHJUDWLQJꢀWKHꢀ6FDQQHUꢀ:LWKꢀ<RXUꢀ+RVWꢀ
6\VWHP
Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface
tact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner’s
hardware compatibility.
You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if
you have no record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the fac-
tory. Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for spe-
cific interface types (see Appendix E, Factory Defaults for more
information); however, your scanner may have been custom configured
with settings that are unique to your company or application.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-1
Once you know the scanner’s current settings, you can determine what
changes will be required to allow communication with your host system
and/or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installa-
tion. After recording the modifications needed, finish reading this section,
then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program
the scanner.
When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scan-
ner is ready to be placed into operation.
&XVWRPL]LQJꢀ<RXUꢀ6FDQQHU¶Vꢀ2SHUDWLRQ
Most scanner programming falls within three general categories:
•
General Scanner and Scale Features - are features common to all
interface types. Examples include beeper adjustments such as vol-
ume and length, read verification settings, etc.
•
Interface Related Features - are the mandatory settings necessary
to allow communication with your host terminal. Examples of
these settings are: RS-232 baud rate and parity.
It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type (for
example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken to select the
correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or
POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS
make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current inter-
face. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the RS-232 interface.
The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming labels for
features invalid to the current interface group.
NOTE
•
Symbology Programming - gives the scanner the capability to
autodiscriminate as few as one, and as many as all available sym-
bologies. For optimal scanner performance enable only those
symbologies required. Additionally the scanner may be pro-
grammed with the standard options available for the various sym-
bologies, such as check digit, minimum label length, fixed and
variable length bar codes, etc.
6-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional infor-
mation, contact your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales represen-
tative.
3URJUDPPLQJꢀ2YHUYLHZ
The scanner’s programmable feature settings can be modified to accom-
modate your system’s unique requirements. These settings can be commu-
nicated to the scanner in one of two ways:
1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of
host commands are available. Refer to Appendix D for more
details or contact Tech Support.
2. The easiest, most comprehensive way to program the scanner is to
use the Configurator Express™ On-Screen Programmining Kit. Ask
your dealer for more information about this product.
3. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scan-
ner’s programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code
labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner’s fea-
tures and options.
When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the scan-
ner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory
defaults.
NOTE
3URJUDPPLQJꢀYLDꢀ+DQGKHOGꢀ'HYLFH
The scanner can also accept programming via its auxiliary port using a
handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability
to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes
presented in this manual. PSC models QuickScan® 1000 and Quick-
Scan® 6000 support this functionality. Handheld data format require-
ments (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in Appendix F of this manual.
Additionally the programmable feature, Aux Port Mode, must be set to
“External Handheld Input” to allow operation.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-3
:KDWꢀ,Vꢀ3URJUDPPLQJꢀ0RGH"
order to accept commands via programming bar code labels. When pro-
gramming using the bar code labels in this manual, the scanner is typically
placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label.
While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes the special
programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See
Appendix A for information about scanner indications while in the Pro-
gramming Mode.
(QWHULQJꢀDQGꢀ([LWLQJꢀ3URJUDPPLQJꢀ0RGHꢏ
Use the bar code label below to enter and exit (‘switch” into and out of)
Programming Mode.
SWITCH LABEL
6-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3URJUDPPLQJꢀ6HVVLRQ
A typical programming session is conducted as follows:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming
Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner
may emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and
the green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scanner
remains in Programming Mode. Normal scanning functions are
disabled.
2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded
1
to make the desired changes. With few exceptions , the scanner
will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming
bar code.
Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound
an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid
to the current interface. Only features supported by the currently active
interface will be implemented.
NOTE
NOTE
If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner’s interface, all previous
configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost.
Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single
digits to set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scan-
ning the SWITCH bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before
completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to
exit Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature
you were trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned dur-
ing the session will take effect.
1. Some features, such as Minimum Label Length, require you to select the label’s length by scan-
ning a series of single-digit bar codes. A single ‘good read’ beep is sounded when scanning these
single digits in Programming Mode. Only the final required digit in the sequence will produce a tri-
ple beep when scanned, indicating a successfully programmed feature.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-5
It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature
at a time. Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence, it
can be difficult to discover where an error has been made if several fea-
tures are programmed at once. Additionally, it can be confusing to deter-
mine which features may or may not have been successfully set following
such a session.
NOTE
3. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit
Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset
upon exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return
to its usual state (on steady or off).
The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following
conditions:
— the programming sequence has been completed or the
SWITCH bar code is scanned
— five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data
1
programmed during the current session will be ignored , and
the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to
initiating the exited session.
— power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Pro-
gramming Mode, before scanning the SWITCH bar code,
will cause all new settings to be ignored. On power-up, the
scanner will return to previous settings.
4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you
know if the original factory settings have been changed.
1. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will
operate on the default settings for the new interface.
6-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3URJUDPPLQJꢀ6HTXHQFH
To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained
in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the
feature being programmed (as shown in Table 6-1). There are three possi-
ble programming sequences:
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that inter-
face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses-
sion. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to
the factory default for that interface type.)
NOTE
A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) dem-
onstrates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the
following:
1. Place the scanner in Programming Mode (SWITCH bar
code).
1
2. Scan the Item Tag that will enable the new feature.
3. End the programming session and reset the scanner
(SWITCH bar code).
B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requir-
ing the entry of a range value. Like sample A, the scanner is
placed in Programming Mode and an Item Tag1 is scanned.
Then, a value must be entered before ending the programming
session. In the example, three digits must be scanned from the
bar codes, is necessary to allow flexible programming for item val-
ues with larger numeric ranges.
C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scan-
ning of a single, extended length bar code. This special program-
ming bar code contains all the data necessary to enter
Programming Mode, set the Item Tag1 and Item Value, and exit
Programming Mode (all in one step).
1. An “Item Tag” is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming
bar code, that toggles (selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-7
/('ꢀDQGꢀ%HHSHUꢀ,QGLFDWRUV
The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various
scanner functions.
,Iꢀ<RXꢀ0DNHꢀDꢀ0LVWDNHꢏꢏꢏ
If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the
scanner’s settings or wish to reset the scanner’s configuration, use the
Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner’s configura-
tion to the factory settings. Scanning this label will also reset any changes
made during previous programming sessions.
5HWXUQꢀWRꢀ)DFWRU\ꢀ6HWWLQJV
Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured
at the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically
used to return the scanner to a “known” operating state when the present
programming status is not known, faulty, or suspect.
Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that may have
been programmed since the scanner’s installation.
CAUTION
DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar code.
NOTE
RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-9
7HVWꢀ0RGH
special mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is
not sent out to the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code
to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS
terminal.
To return the scanner to normal function, scan the TEST MODE = DIS-
ABLE bar code below.
DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar codes
on this page.
Scanning the TEST MODE = DISABLE bar code sets the Double Read
Timeout to 600ms.
NOTE
TEST MODE = DISABLE
TEST MODE = ENABLE
6-10
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*HQHUDOꢀ6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDOHꢀ)HDWXUHV
'RXEOHꢀ5HDGꢀ7LPHRXW
The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how
much time must pass before reading the same label again (e.g. two identi-
cal items in succession).
To set the Double Read Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read
Timeout setting to a higher value.
NOTE
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 400ms
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 600ms
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-11
'RXEOHꢀ5HDGꢀ7LPHRXWꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 800ms
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 1 SECOND
6-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
/DVHUꢀ7LPHRXW
The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser
diodes (VLDs) off if the scanner is idle. Using this feature can prolong the
life of the VLDs.
To set the Laser Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
LASER TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-13
/DVHUꢀ7LPHRXWꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
LASER TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES
LASER TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES
6-14
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
0RWRUꢀ7LPHRXW
The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the
motor off when the scanner is not in use.
Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor. If you set the
motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout, the motor and the laser will
both shut off when the motor timeout expires.
NOTE
To set the Motor Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-15
0RWRUꢀ7LPHRXWꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES
6-16
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
0RWRUꢀ7LPHRXWꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 30 MINUTES
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 60 MINUTES
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-17
*UHHQꢀ/('ꢀ,GOHꢀ6WDWH
This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner
is idle and ready to read a label. Options are:
•
•
Off
On dim
To set the LED Idle State:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GREEN LED IDLE STATE = OFF
GREEN LED IDLE STATE = ON DIM
6-18
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDQQHUꢀ%XWWRQꢀ2SWLRQV
Configure the scanner volume button to one of the following modes of
operation:
•
•
•
•
Enable all functions: Volume, tone, diagnostics and reset.
Enable only volume, tone and reset.
Enable reset only.
Disable all button functions
To set the desired Scanner Button Option:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE ALL FUNCTIONS
SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE ONLY VOLUME/TONE/RESET
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-19
6FDQQHUꢀ%XWWRQꢀ2SWLRQVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE RESET ONLY
SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = DISABLE ALL BUTTON FUNCTIONS
6-20
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3RZHUꢃXSꢀ%HHSꢀ&RQWURO
Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scan-
ner-active mode on power-up. Choices are:
•
•
•
No beep
One beep
Three beeps
To set the Power-up Beep:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
POWER-UP BEEP = OFF
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-21
3RZHUꢃXSꢀ%HHSꢀ&RQWUROꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
POWER-UP BEEP = ONE BEEP
POWER-UP BEEP = THREE BEEPS
6-22
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ&RQWURO
This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a
label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GOOD READ BEEP = DISABLE
GOOD READ BEEP = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-23
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ)UHTXHQF\
Adjusts the scanner’s good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high fre-
quency (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).
•
•
•
Low = 660 Hz
Medium = 860 Hz
High = 1050 Hz
To set the Good Read Beep Frequency:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = LOW
6-24
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ)UHTXHQF\ꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = MEDIUM
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = HIGH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-25
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ/HQJWK
Specifies the duration of a good read beep.
To set the good read beep length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired good read beep length setting. The select-
able range is 1-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond incre-
ments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading
zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-255).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH
6-26
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ9ROXPH
Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable
volumes, with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels
to the previous level:
•
•
•
•
•
0 = Lowest Volume
1 = Medium-Low Volume
2 = Medium Volume
3 = Medium-High Volume
4 =Highest Volume
To set the Good Read Beep Volume:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following
pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = LOWEST
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-27
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ9ROXPHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM LOW
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM
6-28
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ%HHSꢀ9ROXPHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM HIGH
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = HIGHEST
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-29
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ:KHQꢀWRꢀ,QGLFDWH
This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/
or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.
•
•
•
Good Read = Indicate after decode
Good Read = Indicate after transmit
Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active
The “Indicate after CTS goes inactive...” mode applies to RS-232 STD and
RS-232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in other interfaces, “Indicate
after decode” mode will be implemented.
NOTE
To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER DECODE
6-30
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*RRGꢀ5HDGꢀ:KHQꢀWRꢀ,QGLFDWHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER TRANSMIT
GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER CTS GOES INACTIVE, THEN ACTIVE
(RS-232 ONLY)
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-31
6FDOHꢀ(QDEOH
Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding scale functional-
ity. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.
If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is to function as a
scanner-scale, and will indicate an error if it is not a scale-equipped unit.
See Error Codes in Section 4 for more information.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCALE = DISABLE
SCALE = ENABLE
6-32
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ&RXQWU\ꢀ0RGH
When a weight is presented, the scanner/scale will apply the country-spe-
cific weighing rules specified via this feature.
Scale Country Mode applies only when a scale is enabled.
RS-232 SASI scale interface supports only U.S.A. mode.
NOTE
SCALE COUNTRY MODE = U.S.A.
SCALE COUNTRY MODE = U.K.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-33
6FDOHꢀ&RXQWU\ꢀ0RGHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE COUNTRY MODE = AUSTRALIA
6-34
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ(QIRUFHGꢀ=HURꢀ5HWXUQ
This feature enables/disables the enforced zero return of the scale. Three
settings are available for this feature:
•
•
Disable
Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Within Four Minutes — Scale
will require re-zeroing if a non-zero weight is left on for more
than 4 minutes
•
Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Between Weight Requests —
Re-zeroing required if weight doesn't return to zero between
weight requests from the POS, plus scale will require re-zeroing if
a non-zero weight is left on for more than 4 minutes.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strat-
egy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows
normal scale operation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = DISABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-35
6FDOHꢀ(QIRUFHGꢀ=HURꢀ5HWXUQꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = SCALE MUST RETURN TO ZERO WEIGHT
WITHIN 4 MINUTES
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = SCALE MUST RETURN TO ZERO WEIGHT
BETWEEN WEIGHT REQUESTS
6-36
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ$XWRPDWLFꢀ=HURLQJ
This feature enables/disables automatic zeroing of the scale if it goes under
zero. If an under-zero condition is detected and persists for at least five
seconds, the scale will be zeroed as it the zero button had been pressed.
This feature ensures accurate weighing by automatically zeroing after
under-zero conditions are detected, such as after the platter has been
cleared.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCALE AUTOMATIC ZEROING = DISABLE
SCALE AUTOMATIC ZEROING = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-37
6FDOHꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ7\SH
Use this feature to select the scale interface type for RS-232 Standard and
RS-232 Wincor/Nixdorf POS interfaces. Choices are:
•
•
•
No Scale Interface
RS-232 — SASI
RS-232 — ICL
To set the Scale Interface Type:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = NO SCALE INTERFACE
SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — SASI
6-38
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ7\SHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — ICL
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-39
6FDOHꢀ0RWLRQꢀ/HYHOꢀ)LOWHU
In environments where checkstands generate excessive vibration, the scale
can be set to filter a certain amount of the motion with regard to its oper-
ation.
This filter is generally used only in applications where scale error E_1 (too
much motion at power-up) has occurred.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strat-
egy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows
normal scale operation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = LOW
SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = MEDIUM LOW
6-40
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ0RWLRQꢀ/HYHOꢀ)LOWHUꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = MEDIUM HIGH
SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = HIGH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-41
6FDOHꢀ/('ꢀ(QDEOH
This feature enables/disables Scale LED (Yellow LED) operation.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SCALE LED = DISABLE
SCALE LED = ENABLE
6-42
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
5HPRWHꢀ'LVSOD\ꢀ²ꢀ(QDEOHꢎ'LVDEOH
The scanner-scale can be configured to operate with or without a Remote
Display.
Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding a Remote Display.
Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.
If this feature is enabled the scanner-scale will expect that it is connected to
a Remote Display, and will indicate an error if one is not. See Error Codes
in Section 4 for more information.
NOTE
REMOTE DISPLAY = DISABLE
REMOTE DISPLAY = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-43
($6ꢀ$FWLYHꢀ6WDWH
Specifies the active state polarity of EAS (Electronic Article Survellance);
the inactive state is its opposite polarity. EAS output goes active during the
good read of a bar code, allowing the EAS device to deactivate a tag on the
product.
To set the EAS Active State:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE LOW
EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE HIGH
6-44
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($6ꢀ7LPHRXW
Specifies the amount of time that an EAS (Electronic Article Survellance)
signal is held in its active state for a good read.
To set the EAS Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS TIMEOUT below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired EAS Timeout duration. The selectable range
is 0-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad
all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a
three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
000 = EAS timeout disabled
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
A setting of 0 (000) disables this feature.
NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
SET EAS TIMEOUT
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-45
$X[ꢀ3RUWꢀ0RGH
Selects the usage for the scanner’s optional auxiliary port. The choices
listed below are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a
time).
•
•
Disabled — Port is inactive
External Handheld Input — Supports PSC® handheld scanners
models such as the Symbol® HotShot. Call your dealer for more
information about supported devices.
Cable pinout information for the Aux Port is provided in Appendix B of
this manual. A connected handheld scanner must be configured to transmit
data as outlined in Appendix F.
NOTE
•
PIR/CT — PIR (Productivity Index Reporting) allows the scan-
ner to provide information to an external computer indicating
how easy the label was to read. CT (Cashier Training) allows the
scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a
more ergonomic fashion.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
AUX PORT MODE = DISABLE
6-46
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$X[ꢀ3RUWꢀ0RGHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
AUX PORT MODE = EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT
AUX PORT MODE = PIR/CT
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-47
/DVHUꢀ)DLOXUHꢀ0RGH
This configuration item selects whether the scanner should continue oper-
ating if only one laser is functional. (The scanner has two lasers: One for
the horizontal window, and one for the vertical window.) Options for this
feature are:
•
Single Laser Failure OK — The scanner can still operate even if
one laser is no longer functional. In this mode the scanner will
read only from the window associated with the operational laser.
This provides the user the ability to continue working until the
unit is serviced. The 7-segment display will show the error code
for the failed laser (reference Error Codes in Section 4), but the
scanner will continue to function.
•
Single Laser Failure Fatal — If it is desirable to have maximum
performance or nothing at all, Laser Failure Mode should be
selected as fatal. Upon single laser failure, the scanner will sound
an error tone and cease scanning functions until serviced.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
LASER FAILURE MODE = SINGLE LASER FAILURE OK
LASER FAILURE MODE = SINGLE LASER FAILURE FATAL
6-48
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3URGXFWLYLW\ꢀ,QGH[ꢀ5HSRUWLQJꢀꢈ3,5ꢉꢎ&DVKLHUꢀ7UDLQLQJꢀ
ꢈ&7ꢉ
When PIR/CT is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data
before being presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to
provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label
was to read. CT allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on
how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
PIR/CT = DISABLE
PIR/CT = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-49
,QWHUIDFHꢀ5HODWHGꢀ)HDWXUHV
,QWHUIDFHꢀ7\SH
Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are:
INTERFACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERa
INTERFACE TYPE
RS-232 Standard
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
RS-232 Single Cable
IBM USB
05
12
20
45
04
IBM Port 17
NOT USER-SELECTABLE
Indicated by 7-segment FRU display flashing
0 at start-up
Null Interface
a. To access a scanner’s interface identification number, place the
scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode and view the 7-segment FRU
display (reference Scanner Diagnostic Mode in Section 2 for more
information).
A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null Inter-
face (no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at instal-
lation. In this case, the correct Interface Type programming bar code must
be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS system.
NOTE
NOTE
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that inter-
face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses-
sion. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to
the factory default for that interface type.)
6-50
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,QWHUIDFHꢀ7\SHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
To select the desired interface:
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the factory configuration for
that interface as the selection is made, erasing any and all custom configura-
tion that may have previously been done.
NOTE
1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.
2. Scan the SWITCH bar code
3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located
on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
adjacent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to proceed to
the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for
that interface. For example, if RS-232 is selected, turn to the pages in this
manual headed as features specific to the RS-232 interface.
NOTE
5. Connect new interface cable(s).
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-51
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ6HOHFWLRQ
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 STANDARD
6-52
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ:LQFRUꢃ1L[GRUIꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ6HOHFWLRQ
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 WINCOR-NIXDORF
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-53
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ6HOHFWLRQ
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port.
The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE
INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 SINGLE CABLE
6-54
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,%0ꢀ3RUWꢀꢂꢊꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ6HOHFWLRQ
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
When connecting to the POS terminal, you must specify either “Scanner
Only” (“Scanner/Scale Only”) or “IBM 4698” as the model number. The
“Scanner Only” or “Scanner/Scale Only” setting allows for bar code label
programming and sets the unit to factory defaults; the “IBM 4698” setting
will allow host configuration of the unit.
NOTE
The associated POS sockets are 9A and 9E.
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port.
The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE
INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 17
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-55
,%0ꢀ86%ꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ6HOHFWLRQ
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host)
port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE
INTERFACE TYPE = IBM USB
6-56
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
0D[LPXPꢀ+RVWꢃ7UDQVPLWWHGꢀ0HVVDJHꢀ/HQJWK
Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages
transmitted to the host.
To set the Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED
MESSAGE LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length.
The selectable range is 0-249 data characters. (Labels that are
longer than this length are not read.) Pad all single and double
digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(000-249).
If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length limit
imposed on data being transmitted to the host.
NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-57
1XPEHUꢀRIꢀ+RVWꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQꢀ%XIIHUV
Specifies the number of host transmission(s) that may be buffered. By
buffering data from a bar code, the scanner can continue to read a new bar
code while the old one is being transmitted to the host. Selecting BUFF-
ERS = 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new
one can be read. A selection of BUFFERS = 2 means that a new bar code
can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted. When the
feature, Good Read Beep Control, is enabled, the scanner will beep when
the data is placed in a transmission buffer.
When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host, the
scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered.
To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 1
NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 2
6-58
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*OREDOꢀ3UHIL[
This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and
Single Cable). It specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label
transmission.
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GLOBAL PREFIX below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired
character(s). A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their
corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of
this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair
of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-char-
acter value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and
‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any
hex value from 00 to FF. Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated.
NOTE
4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically
exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits
have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can
end the programming sequence early by scanning the TERMI-
NATE SEQUENCE bar code.
5. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-59
*OREDOꢀ6XIIL[
This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and
Single Cable). It specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label trans-
mission. Three standard options are available below. Contact your dealer
for other alternate settings for this feature.
•
•
•
No Global Suffix
CR — Carriage Return
CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed
To set the Global Suffix:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GLOBAL SUFFIX = NO GLOBAL SUFFIX
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-61
*OREDOꢀ6XIIL[ꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR
GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR LF
6-62
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,%0ꢀ)HDWXUHV
,%0ꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ2SWLRQV
IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices.
The IBM USB interface provides its own set of options. Refer to the feature,
IBM USB Interface Options, in this chapter.
NOTE
Options for this feature are as follows:
•
FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale config-
uration host commands.
•
Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale —
Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
IBM INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT
IBM INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER & SCALE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-63
,%0ꢀ6FDOHꢀ$GGUHVV
This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY.
NOTE
Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17. The following three
addresses are available:
•
•
•
6A
6B
6E
To set the IBM Scale Address:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents
the desired scale address designation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6A
6-64
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,%0ꢀ6FDOHꢀ$GGUHVVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6B
IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6E
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-65
,%0ꢀ7UDQVPLWꢀ/DEHOVꢀLQꢀ&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ)RUPDW
This feature enables/disables scanner’s ability to set a symbology identifier
for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an
IBM host. This applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port
5B; Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B.
When enabled, this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17.
NOTE
To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = DISABLE
IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = ENABLE
6-66
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,%0ꢀ86%ꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ2SWLRQV
The IBM-USB interface offers specific control over interaction with cer-
tain devices. Options for this feature are as follows:
•
•
•
FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale config-
uration host commands.
Compatible with Magellan SL host interface support — Uses
Magellan SL host interface support.
Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale ²ꢀ
Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands.
This feature applies only to the IBM USB interface. For other IBM interfaces,
refer to the feature, IBM Interface Options, earlier in this chapter.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-67
,%0ꢀ86%ꢀ,QWHUIDFHꢀ2SWLRQVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = COMPATIBLE W/MAGELLAN SL HOST I/F SUP-
PORT
IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER &
SCALE
6-68
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,%0ꢀ86%ꢀ6FDQQHUꢀ'HYLFHꢀ7\SH
The IBM-USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of
two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scan-
ners you may already have connected to a USB POS, you may need to
change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate. Options are:
•
•
Table Top Scanner
Handheld Scanner
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
IBM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = TABLE TOP SCANNER
IBM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = HANDHELD SCANNER
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-69
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ)HDWXUHV
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ%DXGꢀ5DWH
This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data.
Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to 19200. They
cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 and up.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the
immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 1200
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 2400
6-70
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ%DXGꢀ5DWHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-71
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ%DXGꢀ5DWHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400
6-72
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ%DXGꢀ5DWHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-73
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ1XPEHUꢀRIꢀ'DWDꢀ%LWV
Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data.
8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 7
RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 8
6-74
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ1XPEHUꢀRIꢀ6WRSꢀ%LWV
Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data.
8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 1
RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 2
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-75
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ3DULW\
Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data.
8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.
NOTE
Options for this setting are:
•
•
•
RS-232 PARITY = NONE
RS-232 PARITY = EVEN
RS-232 PARITY = ODD
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing
the desired Parity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only
the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 PARITY = NONE
6-76
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ+DUGZDUHꢀ&RQWURO
Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or
scan control.
Options are:
•
•
•
Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any
activity on the CTS line.
Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmis-
sion of data to the host.
Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for
scanner to read and transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive,
scanner remains in a host- disabled state; following a successful
label transmission, the CTS signal must transition to inactive and
then to active to enable scanning for the next label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired
setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages
to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = DISABLE
6-78
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ+DUGZDUHꢀ&RQWUROꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS FLOW CONTROL
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-79
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ,QWHUFKDUDFWHUꢀ'HOD\
Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the
next in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER
DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is
the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double
digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY
6-80
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ6RIWZDUHꢀ)ORZꢀ&RQWURO
Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters. .
This item will be ignored when the feature, RS-232 NAK Character, is
enabled
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = DISABLE
RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-81
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ+RVWꢀ(FKR
When enabled, this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host
as it comes in. This feature is used for applications where “daisy chaining”
of RS-232 devices onto the same cable is necessary. If, for example, one of
the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while
another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmis-
for a specified period of time (set via RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval).
The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in
order to avoid RS-232 transmission conflicts.
When RS-232 Host Echo is enabled, the following features are ignored: RS-
232 Software Flow Control and RS-232 ACK NAK Enable as well
as all other ACK/ NAK related operations, plus processing of RS-232 host
commands.
NOTE
To enable/disable this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 HOST ECHO = DISABLE
RS-232 HOST ECHO = ENABLE
6-82
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ+RVWꢀ(FKRꢀ4XLHWꢀ,QWHUYDO
This setting specifies the time interval of RS-232 channel inactivity which
must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit
•
0 - 100 = Time in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET
INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0-100,
which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single
and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-
digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-83
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ,JQRUHꢀ+RVWꢀ&RPPDQGV
When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host com-
mands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active,
transmit labels, and transmit scale information. For normal operation of
the interface, disable this feature.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = DISABLE
RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = ENABLE
6-84
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ77/
Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output
pins TxD and RTS.
Choices are:
•
•
Normal RS-232 levels
TTL levels
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for
this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 LEVELS = NORMAL RS-232
RS-232 LEVELS = TTL
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-85
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ77/ꢀ,QYHUW
Enables/disables inversion of TTL.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for
this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 TTL INVERT = DISABLE
RS-232 TTL INVERT = ENABLE
6-86
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ%HHSꢀRQꢀ$6&,,ꢀ%(/
Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on
receiving an ASCII BEL (07 hex).
•
•
Disable
Enable
To enable/disable this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = DISABLE
RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-87
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ%HHSꢀ$IWHUꢀ:HLJK
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is
transmitted to the host. Scale interfaces that support this item are: RS-232
ICL, RS-232 SASI, and RS-232 Single Cable.
To enable/disable the Beep After Weigh feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
BEEP AFTER WEIGH = DISABLE
BEEP AFTER WEIGH = ENABLE
6-88
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ(QDEOH
This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232
ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an
“ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is
in error. Selections for this option are:
•
•
Disable
Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK
response from the host when a label is sent)
•
•
Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the
scanner will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a com-
mand)
Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host
Commands
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the follow-
ing page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 ACK NAK = DISABLE
RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL TRANSMISSION
6-90
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ(QDEOHꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 ACK/NAK = HOST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL & HOST
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-91
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ&KDUDFWHU
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK char-
acter.
DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON,
XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these
characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Num-
ber of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 ACK Character:
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK Character below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table
containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex
Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII
parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal dig-
its for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the
desired ACK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1”
(the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
SET RS-232 ACK Character
6-92
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ1$.ꢀ&KDUDFWHU
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK char-
acter.
DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON,
XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these
characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Number
of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 NAK Character:
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK Character below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table
containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex
Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII
parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal dig-
its for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the
desired NAK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1”
(the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
SET RS-232 NAK Character
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-93
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ5HWU\ꢀRQꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ7LPHRXW
This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS-
232 ACK NAK Timeout Value.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = DISABLE
RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = ENABLE
6-94
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ7LPHRXWꢀ9DOXH
This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character
from the host following a label transmission.
•
•
1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments
To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT
VALUE. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite
timeout. The remaining selectable range is 1-75, which is the tim-
eout in 200-millisecond increments. Pad all single digit numbers
with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-75).
Examples:
00 = Infinite timeout
01 = 200ms
05 = 1,000ms (1 second)
40 = 8,000ms (8 seconds)
75 = 15,000ms (15 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-95
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ5HWU\ꢀ&RXQW
This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label trans-
mission under a retry condition.
To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-255 resets.
Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to
yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
A setting of 255 specifies “retry forever.”
NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT
6-96
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ(UURUꢀ+DQGOLQJ
This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors
detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors
include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as
parity or framing errors.
•
•
•
Ignore Errors (recommended setting)
Assume ACK (risk of lost label data)
Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label)
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = IGNORE ERRORS
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-97
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ$&.ꢀ1$.ꢀ(UURUꢀ+DQGOLQJꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME ACK
RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME NAK
6-98
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'ꢀ&RQWUROꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = ENABLE AS SUFFIX
6-100
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ2SWLRQV
The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options
Single Cable options, please find them referenced as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RS-232 Baud Rate (see page 70)
RS-232 Number of Data Bits (see page 74)
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits (see page 75)
RS-232 Parity (see page 76)
RS-232 Software Flow Control (see page 81)
RS-232 Beep After Weigh (see page 88)
RS-232 Beep on Not on File (see page 89)
RS-232 Label ID Control (see page 99)
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-101
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ6FDQQHUꢀ2QO\ꢀ3URWRFRO
This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable
RS-232.
Options are:
•
•
Scanner/scale RS-232 protocol
Scanner only RS-232 protocol
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER/SCALE
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER ONLY
6-102
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ576ꢀ&76ꢀ6HOHFWLRQ
Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is con-
trolled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be
asserted during label transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the con-
figuration values state, to determine when to send label data.
Choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored
Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored
Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted
Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS
Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted
Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the
desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well
as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 0
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 1
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-103
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ576ꢀ&76ꢀ6HOHFWLRQꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 2
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 3
6-104
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ576ꢀ&76ꢀ6HOHFWLRQꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 4
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 5
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-105
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ8VHꢀ%&&
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = DISABLE
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = ENABLE
6-106
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ8VHꢀ$&.ꢎ1$.
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = DISABLE
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-107
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ8VHꢀ67;
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = DISABLE
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = ENABLE
6-108
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
This feature selects the STX character.
To specify the STX Character:
TER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired
character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their
corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover
of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning dec-
imal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes
to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single charac-
ter value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must
be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal
value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-109
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ8VHꢀ(7;
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ETX.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ETX = DISABLE
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ETX = ENABLE
6-110
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Allows selection of the ETX character.
To specify the ETX Character:
TER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired
character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their
corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover
of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning dec-
imal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes
to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single charac-
ter value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must
be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal
value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-111
6LQJOHꢀ&DEOHꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ36&ꢀ([WHQVLRQV
When PSC extensions are enabled, scale calibration mode information is
communicated to the host. Contact Customer Support for the format of
this information. Choices for this feature are:
•
•
Standard Protocol
Support PSC Extensions to Protocol
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PSC EXTENSIONS = STANDARD PROTOCOL
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PSC EXTENSIONS = SUPPORT PSC EXTENSIONS TO
PROTOCOL
6-112
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6\PERORJ\ꢀ3URJUDPPLQJ
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that inter-
face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses-
sion. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items —
including symbology programming — to the factory default for that inter-
face type.)
NOTE
83&ꢃ$ꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC-A = DISABLE
UPC-A = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-113
83&ꢃ$ꢀ1XPEHUꢀ6\VWHPꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character.
This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-114
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ$ꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-115
([SDQGꢀ83&ꢃ$ꢀWRꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢄ
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE
EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE
6-116
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢎ($1ꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC/EAN AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC/EAN AIM ID = DISABLE
UPC/EAN AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-117
83&ꢃ$ꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-A label ID to be added to bar code data.
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-A LABEL ID
6-118
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ$ꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-119
83&ꢃ$ꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-120
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ$ꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-A 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-121
83&ꢃ(ꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC-E = DISABLE
UPC-E = ENABLE
6-122
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ(ꢀ1XPEHUꢀ6\VWHPꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-123
83&ꢃ(ꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-124
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
([SDQGꢀ83&ꢃ(ꢀWRꢀ83&ꢃ$
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = DISABLE
EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-125
([SDQGꢀ83&ꢃ(ꢀWRꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢄ
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE
EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE
6-126
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ(ꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-E label ID to be added to bar code data.
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-E LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-127
83&ꢃ(ꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-128
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ(ꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-129
83&ꢃ(ꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a UPC-E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-130
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-13 = DISABLE
EAN-13 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-131
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ)LUVWꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-132
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-133
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ,6%1ꢀ&RQYHUVLRQꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to
Bookland ISBN labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion= DISABLE
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = ENABLE
6-134
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢀꢂꢄꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 13 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN 13 LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-135
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-136
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-137
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN-13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
ID = DISABLE below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE
6-138
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
%RRNODQGꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Bookland AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
BOOKLAND AIM ID = DISABLE
BOOKLAND AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-139
%RRNODQGꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data.
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID
6-140
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢋꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-8 = DISABLE
EAN-8 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-141
($1ꢃꢋꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-142
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
([SDQGꢀ($1ꢃꢋꢀWRꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢄ
Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE
EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-143
($1ꢀꢋꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 8 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN 8 LABEL ID
6-144
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢋꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-145
($1ꢃꢋꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-146
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢋꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN-8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-147
($1ꢃꢋꢀ'HFRGLQJꢀ/HYHOV
Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four
selectable levels:
•
•
•
•
Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eleminates mis-
reads. The most secure setting.
Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet
minimizes misreads.
Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggres-
sive.
Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive.
Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this fea-
ture allow a higher potential for misreads.
CAUTION
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following
pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “Slightly More
Aggressive” setting. For default settings for other features, see
Appendix E.
NOTE
6-148
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢋꢀ'HFRGLQJꢀ/HYHOVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-149
($1ꢃꢋꢀ'HFRGLQJꢀ/HYHOVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE
6-150
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
2WKHUꢀ83&ꢎ($1ꢀ2SWLRQV
bologies:
•
•
•
•
•
UPC/EAN Reconstruction
Price Weight Check
Enable EAN Two Label
Addons
UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-151
83&ꢎ($1ꢀ5HFRQVWUXFWLRQ
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode a class of UPC/EAN
labels with voids. The label voids may be caused by printing defects or
physical damage. This feature may be helpful in environments with in-
store printed labels.
Enabling this feature increases the potential of misreads.
CAUTION
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
UPC/EAN RECONSTRUCTION = DISABLE
UPC/EAN RECONSTRUCTION = ENABLE
6-152
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3ULFHꢀ:HLJKWꢀ&KHFN
Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
1
Applies to all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible Number Sys-
tem/First Character digits.
Options are:
•
•
•
•
•
Disable
4-digit price/weight
5-digit price/weight
4-digit European price/weight
5-digit European price/weight
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on fac-
ing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = DISABLE
1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN/
JAN-13 labels with a First Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the
six types. Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-153
3ULFHꢀ:HLJKWꢀ&KHFNꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT
6-154
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3ULFHꢀ:HLJKWꢀ&KHFNꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-155
(QDEOHꢀ($1ꢀ7ZRꢀ/DEHO
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this
feature.
EAN TWO LABEL = DISABLE
EAN TWO LABEL = ENABLE
6-156
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$GGRQV
The scanner is capable of processing different types of addon codes,
including:
•
•
2-Digit Supplemental
5-Digit Supplemental
Options are provided on the following pages for your convenience:
•
•
Disable all addons — The scanner will not look for or read addons.
Optional 2-Digit and 5-Digit Supplemental — Bar codes can be
read which include 2-Digit or 5-Digit Supplementals, however, it is
not required that addons be included in bar codes.
Contact customer support for advanced programming of optional and
conditional addons.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the
following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
ADDONS = DISABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-157
$GGRQVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
ADDONS = OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT AND 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
6-158
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ$ꢀDQGꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ'HFRGLQJꢀ/HYHOV
Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four
selectable levels:
•
•
•
•
Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eleminates mis-
reads. The most secure setting.
Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet
minimizes misreads.
Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggres-
sive.
Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive.
Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this fea-
ture allow a higher potential for misreads.
CAUTION
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following
pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “Slightly More
Aggressive” setting. For default settings for other features, see Appendix E.
NOTE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-159
83&ꢃ$ꢀDQGꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ'HFRGLQJꢀ/HYHOVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE
UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE
6-160
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ$ꢀDQGꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀ'HFRGLQJꢀ/HYHOVꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE
UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-161
*7,1ꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and
EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.
If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion
taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted
GTIN bar code.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
GTIN = DISABLE
GTIN = ENABLE
6-162
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*7,1ꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled.
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET GTIN LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-163
*7,1ꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 2-digit supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-164
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
*7,1ꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 5-digit supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-165
*7,1ꢀ&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDOꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-166
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢃꢂꢅꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode RSS-14 labels.
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your
dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced
capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS-14 = DISABLE
RSS-14 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-167
566ꢃꢂꢅꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of the RSS-14 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS-14 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
RSS-14 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-168
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢃꢂꢅꢎ($1ꢃꢂꢁꢋꢀ(PXODWLRQ
Enables/disables the ability of RSS-14 to be transmitted as EAN-128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS-14/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE
RSS-14/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-169
566ꢃꢂꢅꢀꢁ'ꢀ&RPSRQHQWꢀ(QDEOH
When this feature is enabled, the software will not decode an RSS-14 bar
code with a 2D component associated with it, and the 2D component will
be discarded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS-14 2D COMPONENT = DISABLE
RSS-14 2D COMPONENT = ENABLE
6-170
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢃꢂꢅꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the RSS-14 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS-14 AIM ID = DISABLE
RSS-14 AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-171
566ꢃꢂꢅꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an RSS-14 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS-14 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET RSS-14 LABEL ID
6-172
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode RSS-Expanded labels.
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your
dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced
capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS-EXPANDED = DISABLE
RSS-EXPANDED = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-173
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ($1ꢃꢂꢁꢋꢀ(PXODWLRQ
Enables/disables EAN 128 emulation for RSS Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS EXPANDED/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE
RSS EXPANDED/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE
6-174
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀꢁ'ꢀ&RPSRQHQWꢀ(QDEOH
When this feature is enabled, the software will not decode an RSS
Expanded bar code with a 2D component associated with it, and the 2D
component will be discarded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS EXPANDED 2D COMPONENT = DISABLE
RSS EXPANDED 2D COMPONENT = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-175
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the RSS Expanded AIM
symbology identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
RSS EXPANDED AIM ID = DISABLE
RSS EXPANDED AIM ID = ENABLE
6-176
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an RSS Expanded label ID to be added to bar code
data.
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET RSS EXPANDED LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-177
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for
RSS Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length and RSS Expanded
Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you
must now set RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 and RSS
Expanded Fixed Length 2.
NOTE
RSS EXPANDED LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
RSS EXPANDED LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-178
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an RSS Expanded
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters. This applies
when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
Maximum Label Length should be greater than or equal to Minimum Label
Length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET RSS EXPANDED MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-179
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an RSS Expanded
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters. This applies
when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
Minimum Label Length should be less than or equal to Maximum Label
Length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET RSS EXPANDED MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-180
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies RSS Expanded first fixed length.
length decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 1
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 1
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-181
566ꢀ([SDQGHGꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies RSS Expanded second fixed length.
length decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 2
6-182
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 39 = DISABLE
CODE 39 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-183
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ6WDUWꢀ6WRSꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-184
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ&DOFXODWLRQ
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check
character. When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data
character.
If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can
occur.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-185
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-186
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ)XOOꢀ$6&,,
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full
ASCII labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 39 FULL ASCII = DISABLE
CODE 39 FULL ASCII = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-187
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 39 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 39 AIM ID = DISABLE
CODE 39 AIM ID = ENABLE
6-188
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 39 LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-189
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Code 39 Maximum Label Length and Code 39 Minimum Label
Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set Code
39 Fixed Length 1 and Code 39 Fixed Length 2.
NOTE
CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-190
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 39 label.
Length in this case includes check, data and ASCII characters, but does
not include start, or stop characters. This feature applies when Code 39
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 39 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-191
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 39 label.
Length in this case includes check, data and ASCII characters, but does
not include start, or stop characters. This feature applies when Code 39
Minumum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 39 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-192
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies Code 39 first fixed length.
This applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to fixed-length
decoding.
The minimum decodable length is four when an optional check character
is present.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 1
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-193
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies Code 39 second fixed length.
decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00, then Fixed Length 1 will apply
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, no second fixed length, or 01 to 50. Pad all sin-
gle digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry
(00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 2
6-194
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
CODE 39 STITCHING = DISABLE
CODE 39 STITCHING = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-195
3KDUPDFRGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode
39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
PHARMACODE 39 = DISABLE
PHARMACODE 39 = ENABLE
6-196
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3KDUPDFRGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ6WDUWꢀ6WRSꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode
39.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-197
3KDUPDFRGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-198
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3KDUPDFRGHꢀꢄꢌꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code
data.
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-199
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 128 = DISABLE
CODE 128 = ENABLE
6-200
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ7UDQVPLWꢀ)XQFWLRQꢀ&KDUDFWHUV
Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3,
and 4.
Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = DISABLE
CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-201
&RQYHUWꢀ&RGHꢂꢁꢋꢀWRꢀ&RGHꢀꢄꢌ
Enables/disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = DISABLE
CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = ENABLE
6-202
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 128 AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 128 AIM ID = DISABLE
CODE 128 AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-203
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 128 LABEL ID
6-204
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Code 128 Maximum Label Length and Code 128 Minimum
Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set
Code 128 Fixed Length 1 and Code 128 Fixed Length 2.
NOTE
CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-205
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 128 label.
Length in this case includes function characteres and data characters,
but does not include function code change or check character. This fea-
ture applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 128 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-206
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 128 label.
Length in this case includes function characteres and data characters,
but does not include function code change or check character. This fea-
ture applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
Minumum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 128 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-207
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies Code 128 first fixed length.
decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 1
6-208
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies Code 128 second fixed length.
decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 2
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-209
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
CODE 128 STITCHING = DISABLE
CODE 128 STITCHING = ENABLE
6-210
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢂꢁꢋꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN-128 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN-128 = DISABLE
EAN-128 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-211
($1ꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the EAN 128 AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
EAN 128 AIM ID = DISABLE
EAN 128 AIM ID = ENABLE
6-212
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an EAN 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET EAN 128 LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-213
,QWHUOHDYHGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀꢈ,ꢀꢁꢀ2)ꢀꢆꢉꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5
labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
I 2 OF 5 = DISABLE
I 2 OF 5 = ENABLE
6-214
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ&DOFXODWLRQ
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2
of 5 check character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-
read can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are
treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-215
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check char-
acter.
This feature applies only when I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit,
is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-216
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the I 2 of 5 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
I 2 of 5 AIM ID = DISABLE
I 2 of 5 AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-217
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID
6-218
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for I 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features I 2
of 5 Maximum Label Length and I 2 of 5 Minimum Label
Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set I 2 of 5
Fixed Length 1 and I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2.
NOTE
I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-219
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an I 2 of 5 label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start or stop characters. This feature applies when I 2 of 5
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit
numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET I 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-220
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an I 2 of 5 label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start or stop characters. This feature applies when I 2 of 5
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit
numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET I 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-221
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies I 2 of 5 first fixed length.
decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit
numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1
6-222
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies I 2 of 5 second fixed length.
ing.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, or 02 to 50; even numbers only. Pad all single
digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-
50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-223
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar
code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code
parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE
I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE
6-224
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR = DISABLE
CODABAR = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-225
&RGDEDUꢀ6WDUWꢀ6WRSꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-226
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ6WDUWꢀ6WRSꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ6HW
This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop charac-
ters.
Options are:
•
•
•
•
ABCD/TN* E
ABCD/ABCD
abcd/tn* e
abcd/abcd
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing
the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and
facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/TN* E
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/ABCD
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-227
&RGDEDUꢀ6WDUWꢀ6WRSꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ6HWꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/tn* e
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/abcd
6-228
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ6WDUWꢀ6WRSꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ0DWFK
Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = DISABLE
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-229
&RGDEDUꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ&DOFXODWLRQ
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check
character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-
read can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are
treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
6-230
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character.
Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation is enabled.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-231
&RGDEDUꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Codabar AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODABAR AIM ID = DISABLE
CODABAR AIM ID = ENABLE
6-232
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data.
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODABAR LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-233
&RGDEDUꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Codabar.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Codabar Maximum Label Length and Codabar Minimum
Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set
Codabar Fixed Length 1 and Codabar Fixed Length 2.
NOTE
CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-234
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Codabar label.
Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODABAR MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-235
&RGDEDUꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Codabar label.
Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODABAR MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-236
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies Codabar first fixed length.
Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters.
length decoding.
NOTE
Decodable length is four when the optional check character is present.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 1
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-237
&RGDEDUꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies Codabar second fixed length.
Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters.
This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to fixed-
length decoding.
Decodable length is four when the optional check character is present.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, or 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 2
6-238
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDUꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
CODABAR STITCHING = DISABLE
CODABAR STITCHING = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-239
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 93 = DISABLE
CODE 93 = ENABLE
6-240
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 93 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
CODE 93 AIM ID = DISABLE
CODE 93 AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-241
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data..
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 93 LABEL ID
6-242
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 93.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Code 93 Maximum Label Length and Code 93 Minimum Label
Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set Code 93
Fixed Length 1 and Code 93 Fixed Length 2.
NOTE
CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-243
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 93 label.
Length in this case includes data characters, but does not include start,
stop, full ASCII shift, or check characters. This feature applies when
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 93 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-244
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 93 label.
Length in this case includes data characters, but does not include start,
stop, full ASCII shift, or check characters. This feature applies when
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 93 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-245
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies Code 93 first fixed length.
decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 1
6-246
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies Code 93 second fixed length.
decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, or 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 2
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-247
&RGHꢀꢌꢄꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for Code 93 labels. When parts of a Code 93
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
CODE 93 STITCHING = DISABLE
CODE 93 STITCHING = ENABLE
6-248
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI/Plessey labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY = DISABLE
MSI/PLESSEY = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-249
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ&DOFXODWLRQ
Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI/Plessey
check characters.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-
read can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are
treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
6-250
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ1XPEHUꢀRIꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUV
Specifies number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and
verified.
Check characters are always modulus 10.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/
Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 1
MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 2
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-251
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.
This feature applies only when MSI/Plessey Check Character Calcu-
lation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full
Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-252
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the MSI/Plessey AIM sym-
bology identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY AIM ID = DISABLE
MSI/PLESSEY AIM ID = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-253
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an MSI/Plessey label ID to be added to bar code
data.
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID
6-254
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for MSI/Plessey.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length and MSI/Plessey Mini-
mum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must
now set I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and MSI/Plessey Fixed Length
2.
NOTE
MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-255
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an MSI/Plessey
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start, stop or full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a lead-
ing zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET MSI/PLESSEY MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-256
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an MSI/Plessey
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start, stop or full ASCII shift characters. This applies when MSI/
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a lead-
ing zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-257
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies MSI/Plessey first fixed length.
Control is set to fixed-length decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 1
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 1
6-258
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies MSI/Plessey second fixed length.
decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 0 (zero), or 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers
with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00, 04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 2
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-259
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\ꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for MSI/Plessey labels. When parts of an MSI/
Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the
bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data
will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = DISABLE
MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = ENABLE
6-260
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ(QDEOH
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5
labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
STANDARD 2 OF 5 = DISABLE
STANDARD 2 OF 5 = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-261
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ&KHFNꢀ&KDUDFWHUꢀ&DOFXODWLRQ
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of
5 check character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-
read can occur. When disabled, any check character in a bar code is
treated as data character.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
6-262
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check charac-
ter.
This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Cal-
culation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature,
Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-263
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ$,0ꢀ,'
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Standard 2 of 5 AIM
symbology identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 AIM ID = DISABLE
STANDARD 2 of 5 AIM ID = ENABLE
6-264
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ/DEHOꢀ,'
This feature specifies an Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code
data.
The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is
disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-265
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ/HQJWKꢀ&RQWURO
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Standard 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length and Standard 2 of 5 Mini-
mum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now
set Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length
2.
NOTE
STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-266
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ0D[LPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Standard 2 of 5
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does
not include start or stop characters. This feature applies when
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
label length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit num-
bers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-267
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ0LQLPXPꢀ/DEHOꢀ/HQJWK
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an Standard 2 of 5
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start or stop characters. This feature applies when Standard 2
of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
length.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit num-
bers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
6-268
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢂ
This feature specifies Standard 2 of 5 first fixed length.
length decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this
option is 1 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to
yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-269
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ)L[HGꢀ/HQJWKꢀꢁ
This feature specifies Standard 2 of 5 second fixed length.
This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length
decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this
option is 1 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to
yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2
6-270
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6WDQGDUGꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆꢀ6WLWFKLQJ
Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Stan-
dard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled,
the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data
will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length
decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.
STANDARD 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE
STANDARD 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ6-271
127(6
6-272
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$SSHQGL[ $
/('ꢎ%HHSHUꢀ,QGLFDWLRQVꢀ;ꢀ&RQWUROV
Figure A-1 shows the operator’s controls and indicators. The descriptions
following identify the use or function of each component.
)LJXUH $ꢃꢂꢏꢀ6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDOHꢀ&RQWUROV
Volume/Tone Push Button
Green LED
Yellow LED
Scale Zero
Push Button
&RQWUROVꢀDQGꢀ,QGLFDWRUV
The control panel consists of two indicator LEDs and two push buttons as
described in the following pages.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀA-1
,QGLFDWRUꢀ/('V
The green LED indicates scanner status, and the yellow LED is primarily
used to show scale status as described in Table A-1 below:
7DEOH $ꢃꢂꢏꢀ*UHHQꢀDQGꢀ<HOORZꢀ/('ꢀ)XQFWLRQV
LED
INDICATION
DURATION
COMMENT
Yellow LED on steady
Scale at Zeroa
The scale is at rest and reads zero weight.
Scanner
Activea
Green LED on steady and dim
Green LED - bright flash
The scanner is ready for operation. Scanning is
immediately available.
Good Read
Indicationa
Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded.
Program Mode
Indication
Green LED - Continuous flashing
Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming
Mode. Cycle power to exit Programming Mode.
The scanner motor and/or laser have automati-
cally switched off and the unit has entered Sleep
Mode due to extended inactivity.
Sleep Mode
Indication
Green LED blinks at a 2-second rate
1-second off, 1/10-second on
Host Disabled
Host has disabled scanning.
Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has been
detected. Consult Error Codes in Section 4 for
more details. If a low tone is heard, but continuous
flashing is not observed, the scanner can still func-
tion in a limited capacity. Call systems support for
service in either case.
Audible low tone 3 seconds.
Alternating Green/Yellow LED flashes
continuously.
Field Replace-
able Unit (FRU)
Warning (Error
Mode)
Green LED flashes a coded
sequence in concert with the speaker.
Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button push fol-
lowing a FRU warning. Enables service techni-
cians to identify FRU failures.
FRU Indication
a. Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner
may not be programmed to display all indications.
A-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
9ROXPHꢎ7RQHꢀ3XVKꢀ%XWWRQ
The Volume/Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depend-
ing upon the duration of time it is pressed:
Volume changes made using the Volume/Tone Push Button are lost when the
scanner is powered-down and are reset to the factory default setting. If you
wish to permanently change the volume, use the special programming labels
in Section 6, Programming.
NOTE
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀA-3
7DEOH $ꢃꢁꢏꢀ9ROXPHꢎ7RQHꢀ3XVKꢀ%XWWRQꢀ)XQFWLRQV
PRESS
DURATION
FUNCTION
COMMENT
Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by:
- Moving an object through the scan zone.
- A weight change on the scale.
Momentary (when
scanner is asleep)
Wakes scanner from Sleep
Mode
- Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner.
Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker
volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a
repeated press of the push button cycles volume back
to the lowest setting, then volume increases on subse-
quent press(es). Five volume levels are available.
Momentary (when
scanner is awake)
Increments volume
Increments tone
Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds,
then release. Each time this is done, the beeper will
sound at one of three tones. Stop when the desired
tone (high, medium or low) is sounded.
Hold, then release
when the beeper
sounds
This mode allows system support personnel to trouble-
shoot problems with the scanner. Upon entering Scan-
ner Diagnostic Mode, view the 7-segment display to
view Interface Type, Bootloader Version Number, Appli-
cation Version Number and Configuration File Number.
This mode is used to determine if a scanner can read
bar codes. Press the button for eight seconds or cycle
power to exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the
scanner.
Scanner Diagnostics Modea
4 Seconds
8 Seconds
Resets Scannerb
Only system support personnel should perform a reset.
a. By standard default, this function is normally disabled to prevent accidental activation by users.
b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support person-
nel.
A-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
6FDOHꢀ=HURꢀ3XVKꢀ%XWWRQ
The Scale Zero Push Button is used for multiple functions as listed in
Table A-3.
The Scale Zero Push Button has no function in a “scanner only” model.
NOTE
7DEOH $ꢃꢄꢏꢀ6FDOHꢀ=HURꢀ3XVKꢀ%XWWRQꢀ)XQFWLRQV
PRESS
DURATION
FUNCTION
COMMENT
When programmed to do so, the yellow LED should be lit when no
weight is on the scale, indicating scale at zero. If it is not, press the
switch to zero the scale. The unit will sound a “click” upon pressing
the button.
Momentary
4 Seconds
Zero Scale
This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot prob-
lems with the scale. Momentarily press the Scale Zero Push Button
or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnostics Mode.
Scale Diagnostics
Modea
a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to ini-
tiate this function under normal circumstances.
&DOLEUDWLRQꢀ6ZLWFK
This switch initiates the scale’s calibration routine. A certified weight set is
needed to perform the scale calibration steps detailed in Section 5, Cali-
bration. This switch is not included in scanners without scale modules.
&DOLEUDWLRQꢀ6ZLWFKꢀ6HDO
This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch access cover and
restrict access to the Calibration Switch. If the calibration seal is broken or
missing, you may be prohibited from operating the scale without recertifi-
cation. Check local and state requirements for specific restrictions.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀA-5
&DOLEUDWLRQꢀ6ZLWFKꢀ&RYHU
This cover restricts access to the Calibration Switch to help guard against
unauthorized tampering when sealed.
There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure compli-
ance when operating a weighing device such as the scanner/scale. Fail-
ure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal
action.
LEGAL NOTE
LEGAL NOTE
A-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$SSHQGL[ %
&DEOHꢀ,QIRUPDWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create
standard interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner, scale,
external handheld scanner, and POS terminal.
*HQHUDOꢀ6SHFLILFDWLRQV
:LUHꢀ5HTXLUHPHQWV
•
•
•
Cable length should not exceed 15 feet.
Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG).
If run exceeds 15 feet, we recommend 26 AWG wire size.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ%ꢃꢂ
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
6FDQQHU
&RQQHFWRUꢀ+DUGZDUH
RJ45, 10 Position
&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
7DEOH %ꢃꢂꢏꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ&DEOHꢀ3LQRXWV
PIN #
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
1
2
+5V pullup
CTS in
N/C
+5V pullup
Clear To Send (input)
No Connection
3
4
RTS out
RxD in
TxD out
N/C
Request To Send (output)
Receive Data (Input)
Transmit Data (output)
No Connection
5
6
7
8
+5V out
GND
+5V out
9
Signal Ground
10
N/C
No Connection
%ꢃꢁ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ&DEOHꢀ3LQRXWꢀ²ꢀFRQWLQXHG
6FDOH
&RQQHFWRUꢀ+DUGZDUH
RJ45, 10 Position
&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
7DEOH %ꢃꢁꢏꢀ
PIN #
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
1
2
+5V pullup
CTS IN
N/C
+5V pullup
Clear To Send (input)
No Connection
3
4
RTS OUT
RxD IN
TxD OUT
N/C
Request To Send (output)
Receive Data (Input)
Transmit Data (output)
No Connection
5
6
7
8
+5V out
Gnd
+5V out
9
Signal Ground
10
N/C
No Connection
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ%ꢃꢄ
,%0ꢀ&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDOH
&RQQHFWRUꢀ+DUGZDUH
RJ45, 10 Position
&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
7DEOH %ꢃꢄ
FUNCTION
PIN #
DESCRIPTION
1
2
+5V pullup
N/C
+5V pullup
No Connection
No Connection
Serial Data -
No Connection
Serial Data +
No Connection
+5V out
3
N/C
4
Serial I/O B
N/C
5
6
Serial I/O A
N/C
7
8
+5V out
Ground
N/C
9
Signal Ground
No Connection
10
%ꢃꢅ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
,%0ꢀ86%ꢀ&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDOH
&RQQHFWRUꢀ+DUGZDUH
RJ45, 10 Position
&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
7DEOH %ꢃꢅ
PIN #
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
1
2
+5V pullup
N/C
+5V pullup
No Connection
No Connection
USB D-
3
N/C
4
USB D-
N/C
5
No Connection
USB D+
6
USB D+
N/C
7
No Connection
+5V out
8
+5V out
GND
9
Signal Ground
No Connection
10
N/C
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ%ꢃꢆ
$X[LOLDU\ꢀ3RUW
([WHUQDOꢀ+DQGKHOGꢀ,QSXW
&RQQHFWRUꢀ+DUGZDUH
RJ45, 10 Position
&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
7DEOH %ꢃꢆ
PIN #
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
1
2
+5V pullup
CTS in
N/C
+5V pullup
Clear To Send (input)
No Connection - Reserved
Request To Send (output)
Receive Data (Input)
Transmit Data (output)
No Connection
3
4
RTS out
RxD in
TxD out
N/C
5
6
7
8
+5V out (500mA max) +5V out
9
GND
N/C
Signal Ground
No Connection
10
%ꢃꢇ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($6ꢀ,QWHUORFNꢀ&RQQHFWRU
6FDQQHUꢀDQGꢀ6FDOH
Antenna Connections. Connect ONLY using approved cables approved by
the manufacturer for this product.
NOTE
&RQQHFWRUꢀ+DUGZDUH
RJ-4
&DEOHꢀ3LQRXW
7DEOH %ꢃꢇ
PIN #
SIGNAL
1
2
3
4
GND
+5V Out
EAS Out
Speaker Outa
a. The “Speaker Out” line is an analog signal (5Vpp
max), connected to one of the internal speaker termi-
nals, intended to connect to an external amplifier to
drive an external speaker.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀ%ꢃꢊ
127(6
%ꢃꢋ
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$SSHQGL[ &
.H\SDG
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
0
1
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀC-1
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
2
3
C-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
4
5
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀC-3
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
6
7
C-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
8
9
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀC-5
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
A
B
C-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
C
D
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀC-7
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
E
F
C-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$SSHQGL[ '
+RVWꢀ&RPPDQGV
$FFHSWLQJꢀ&RPPDQGVꢀIURPꢀDQꢀ56ꢃꢁꢄꢁꢀ6FDQꢃ
QHUꢀ+RVW
The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands:
COMMAND
ASCII
HEX
COMMENT
Enable Scanner
Disable Scanner
Reset Scanner
E
D
R
F
0x45
0x44
0x52
0x46
0x42
0x01
0x07
0x69
Not On File Indication
Beep Good Read Tone
Force Good Read Tone
Bel
Long series of beeps
Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled
Beeps regardless of beep setting
Force Good Read Tone
B
Returns long responsea
Returns long responsea
Returns long responsea
Identification request
i
Health request
Status request
h
s
0x68
0x73
a. Call Tech Support for information.
If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the
steps indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is
also available. Contact Tech Support for more details.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀD-1
127(6
D-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$SSHQGL[ (
)DFWRU\ꢀ'HIDXOWV
The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings
for the interfaces shown.
7DEOH (ꢃꢂꢏꢀ)DFWRU\ꢀ'HIDXOWꢀ6HWWLQJV
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
Aux
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
(600ms)
60
(600ms)
60
(600ms)
60
(600ms)
60
(600ms)
60
(600ms)
Double Read Timeout
Laser Timeout
40
40
(10 min.)
40
(10 min.)
40
(10 min.)
40
(10 min.)
40
(10 min.)
Motor Timeout
Green LED Idle State
1
1
1
1
1
1
Scanner Button Options
Power-up Beep Control
reset)
(vol/tone/
reset)
(vol/tone/
reset)
(vol/tone/
reset)
(vol/tone/
reset)
(vol/tone/
reset)
1 beep
1 beep
1 beep
1 beep
1 beep
Good Read Beep Con-
trol
Good Read Beep Fre-
quency
1
1
(medium)
1
(medium)
1
(medium)
1
(medium)
1
(medium)
Good Read Beep
Length
8 (80ms)
8 (80ms)
8 (80ms)
8 (80ms)
8 (80ms)
8 (80ms)
Good Read Beep Vol-
ume
high)
3 (med-
high)
3 (med-
high)
3 (med-
high)
3 (med-
high)
3 (med-
high)
Good Read When to
Indicate
0 (after
decode)
0 (after
decode)
0 (after
decode)
0 (after
decode)
0 (after
decode)
0 (after
decode)
Scale Enable
0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US)
Scale Country Mode
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-1
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
Aux
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Scale Enforced Zero
Return
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
7 (RS-232
single
cable)
SASI)
1 (IBM
Port 17)
3
(IBM USB)
Scale Interface Type
SASI)
SASI)
Scale Motion Level Fil-
ter
0 (low)
0 (low)
0 (low)
0 (low)
0 (low)
Scale LED Enable
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Remote Display —
Enable/Disable
0 (active
low)
0 (active
low)
0 (active
low)
0 (active
low)
0 (active
low)
0 (active
low)
EAS Active State
EAS Timeout
2 (20ms)
2 (20ms)
2 (20ms)
2 (20ms)
2 (20ms)
2 (20ms)
Aux Port Mode
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
OK)
0 (single
OK)
0 (single
OK)
0 (single
OK)
0 (single
OK)
0 (single
OK)
Laser Failure Mode
Productivity Index
Reporting(PIR)/Cashier 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Training (CT)
Maximum Host-Trans-
0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit)
mitted Message Length
Number of Host Trans-
mission Buffers
1
1
1
0
(1 buffer)
0
(1 buffer)
Global Prefix
("")
("")
("")
("")
("")
0D00
("\0D")
0D00
("\0D")
Global Suffix
0D00("")
IBM Scale Address
110
IBM Transmit Labels in
Code 39 Format
0 (disable)
E-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
Aux
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
IBM USB Scanner
Device Type
0 (fixed
scanner)
RS-232 Baud Rate
1 (9600)
1 (9600)
1 (9600)
1 (9600)
RS-232 Number of Data
Bits
bits)
1 (8 data
bits)
1 (8 data
bits)
0 (7 data
bits)
RS-232 Number of Stop
Bits
bit)
0 (1 stop
bit)
0 (1 stop
bit)
0 (1 stop
bit)
RS-232 Parity
0 (none)
2 (odd)
2 (odd)
RS-232 Hardware Con-
trol
1 (enable
CTS flow)
RS-232 Intercharacter
Delay
0 (none)
0 (none)
0 (none)
RS-232 Software Flow
Control
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable)
RS-232 Host Echo
RS-232 Host Echo
Quiet Interval
1 (10ms)
RS-232 Ignore Host
Commands
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (normal
RS-232)
0 (normal
RS-232)
RS-232 TTL
RS-232 TTL Invert
RS-232 Beep on ASCII
BEL
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
RS-232 Beep After
Weigh
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable)
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
RS-232 Beep on Not on
File
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-3
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
Aux
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
RS-232 ACK NAK
Enable
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
RS-232 ACK Character
RS-232 NAK Character
6 (ACK)
6 (ACK)
6 (ACK)
21 (NAK)
21 (NAK)
RS-232 Retry on ACK
NAK Timeout
RS-232 ACK NAK Tim-
eout Value
RS-232 ACK NAK Retry
Count
3 resets
3 resets
RS-232 ACK NAK Error
Handling
0 (ignore
0 (ignore
errors)
0 (ignore
errors)
RS-232 Label ID Con-
trol
1 (enable
1 (enable
as prefix)
1 (enable
as prefix)
1 (enable
as prefix)
Single Cable RS-232
Scanner Only Protocol
0 (scan-
ner-scale)
Single Cable RS-232
RTS CTS Selection
Option 5
Single Cable RS-232
Use BCC
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Single Cable RS-232
Single Cable RS-232
Use STX
Set Single Cable RS-
232 STX Character
83 (S)
Single Cable RS-232
Use ETX
1 (enable)
Set Single Cable RS-
232 ETX Character
13 (CR)
E-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Single Cable RS-232
PSC Extensions
0 (std
protocol)
UPC-A Enable
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
tem Character Trans-
mission
0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
UPC-A Check Charac-
ter Transmission
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Expand UPC-A to EAN-
13
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
UPC/EAN AIM ID
UPC-A Label ID
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
UPC-A 2-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
UPC-A 5-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
UPC-A 128 Supplemen-
tal Label ID
UPC-E Enable
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
tem Character Trans-
mission
UPC-E Check Charac-
ter Transmission
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Expand UPC-E to UPC-
A
Expand UPC-E to EAN-
13
UPC-E Label ID
4500("E")
4500("E")
4300("C")
4500("E")
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-5
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
4500("E")
4500("E")
4500("E")
IBM 17
IBM USB
UPC-E 2-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
4500("E")
4500("E")
4500("E")
4300("C")
4300("C")
4300("C")
4500("E")
4500("E")
4500("E")
UPC-E 5-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
UPC-E 128 Supplemen-
tal Label ID
EAN-13 Enable
EAN-13 First Character
Transmission
EAN-13 Check Charac-
ter Transmission
EAN-13 ISBN Conver-
sion Enable
EAN 13 Label ID
4600("F")
4600("F")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4600("F")
4600("F")
EAN-13 2-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
EAN-13 5-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
4600("F")
4600("F")
4600("F")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4600("F")
4600("F")
EAN-13 128 Supple-
mental Label ID
Bookland AIM ID
Bookland Label ID
EAN-8 Enable
4900 ("I") 4900 ("I") 4100 ("A")
4900 ("I")
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
EAN-8Check Character
Transmission
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-
13
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
4646
("FF")
4646
("FF")
4646
("FF")
EAN 8 Label ID
4200 ("B")
E-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
EAN-8 2-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
4646
4646
("FF")
4646
("FF")
4200 ("B")
4200 ("B")
4200 ("B")
EAN-8 5-Digit Supple-
mental Label ID
4646
4646
("FF")
4646
("FF")
EAN-8 128 Supplemen-
tal Label ID
("FF")
4646
("FF")
4646
("FF")
UPC/EAN Reconstruc-
tion
Price Weight Check
Enable EAN Two Label
Addons
Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All
RSS-14 Enable
RSS-14 Check Charac-
ter Transmission
RSS-14/EAN-128 Emu-
lation
RSS-14 2D Compo-
nent Enable
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
RSS-14 AIM ID
("R4")
5234
("R4")
5234
("R4")
RSS-14 Label ID
RSS Expanded Enable
4500 ("E")
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
RSS Expanded EAN-
128 Emulation
RSS Expanded 2D
Component Enable
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
RSS Expanded AIM ID
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-7
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
RSS Expanded Label
ID
5258
5258
("RX")
5258
("RX")
4500 ("E")
RSS Expanded Length
Control
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
RSS Expanded Maxi-
mum Label Length
1
74
1
74
1
74
1
74
1
74
1
RSS Expanded Mini-
mum Label Length
RSS Expanded Fixed
Length 1
RSS Expanded Fixed
Length 2
14
14
14
14
14
14
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Start Stop
Character Transmission
Code 39 Check Charac-
ter Calculation
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Code 39 Check Charac-
ter Transmission
Code 39 Full ASCII
Code 39 AIM ID
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
4D00
("M")
4231
("B1")
Code 39 Label ID
2A00 ("*")
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
Code 39 Length Control
Code 39 Maximum
Label Length
50
2
50
2
50
2
50
2
50
2
50
2
Code 39 Minimum
Label Length
E-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Code 39 Fixed Length 1
Code 39 Fixed Length 2
Code 39 Stitching
14
14
14
14
14
14
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Pharmacode 39 Enable
Stop Character Trans-
mission
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Pharmacode 39 Check
Character Transmission
Pharmacode 39 Label
ID
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
4100("A")
Code 128 Enable
Code 128 Transmit
Function Characters
Convert Code128 to
Code 39
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Code 128 AIM ID
Code 128 Label ID
4233
("B3")
Code 128 Length Con-
trol
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
Code 128 Maximum
Label Length
2
80
2
80
2
80
2
80
2
80
2
Code 128 Minimum
Label Length
Code 128 Fixed Length
1
8
8
8
8
8
8
Code 128 Fixed Length
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-9
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
Aux
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Code 128 Stitching
EAN-128 Enable
EAN 128 AIM ID
EAN 128 Label ID
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable)
0000 ("")
5000 ("P")
0000 ("")
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2
OF 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Check Charac-
ter Calculation
I 2 of 5 Check Charac-
ter Transmission
I 2 of 5 AIM ID
4232
("B2")
I 2 of 5 Label ID
6900 ("i")
4900 ("I")
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
I 2 of 5 Length Control
I 2 of 5 Maximum Label
Length
50
6
50
6
50
6
50
6
50
6
50
6
I 2 of 5 Minimum Label
Length
I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1
I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2
I 2 of 5 Stitching
10
10
10
10
10
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Codabar Enable
Codabar Start Stop
Character Transmission
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Codabar Start Stop
Character Set
3 (abcd/
abcd)
3 (abcd/
abcd)
3 (abcd/
abcd)
3 (abcd/
abcd)
3 (abcd/
abcd)
3 (abcd/
abcd)
E-10
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Codabar Start Stop
Character Match
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Codabar Check Char-
acter Calculation
Codabar Check Char-
acter Transmission
Codabar AIM ID
Codabar Label ID
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
Codabar Length Control
Codabar Maximum
Label Length
50
8
50
8
50
8
50
8
50
8
50
8
Codabar Minimum
Label Length
Code 93 Fixed Length 1
Codabar Fixed Length 2
Codabar Stitching
Code 93 Enable
8
8
8
8
8
8
14
14
14
14
14
14
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Code 93 AIM ID
Code 93 Label ID
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
Code 93 Length Control
Code 93 Maximum
Label Length
50
2
50
2
50
2
50
2
50
2
50
2
Code 93 Minimum
Label Length
Code 93 Fixed Length 1
Code 93 Fixed Length 2
8
8
8
8
8
8
14
14
14
14
14
14
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-11
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
Aux
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Code 93 Stitching
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Check
Character Calculation
MSI/Plessey Number of
Check Characters
char)
char)
char)
char)
MSI/Plessey Check
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
MSI/Plessey AIM ID
MSI/Plessey Label ID
4000
4000
("@")
4000
("@")
4F00 ("O")
MSI/Plessey Length
Control
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
MSI/Plessey Maximum
Label Length
16
16
16
MSI/Plessey Minimum
Label Length
MSI/Plessey Fixed
Length 1
7
7
7
7
MSI/Plessey Fixed
Length 2
8
8
8
8
MSI/Plessey Stitching
Standard 2 of 5 Enable
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Standard 2 of 5 Check
Character Calculation
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Standard 2 of 5 Check
Character Transmission
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID
E-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Single
Cable
RS-232
IBM 17
IBM USB
Standard 2 of 5 Label
ID
Standard 2 of 5 Length
Control
0
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
0
(variable)
Standard 2 of 5 Maxi-
mum Label Length
50
50
50
50
50
Standard 2 of 5 Mini-
mum Label Length
Standard 2 of 5 Fixed
Length 1
10
0
10
0
10
0
10
0
10
0
10
0
Standard 2 of 5 Fixed
Length 2
Standard 2 of 5 Stitch-
ing
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀE-13
127(6
E-14
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
$SSHQGL[ )
+DQGKHOGꢀ'DWDꢀ)RUPDWꢀ5HTXLUHPHQWV
This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of
data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxiliary port as
transmitted from a handheld scanner.
+DQGKHOGꢀ'DWDꢀ)RUPDWꢀ5HTXLUHPHQWVꢀ*HQHUDO
•
9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
•
RTS is used to "bracket" the data received from the handheld:
RTS must be asserted high during data transmission, and de-
asserted after label transmission is complete. No other flow con-
trol mechanisms are required or supported.
•
•
•
•
•
Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce
length requirements for validation of the label.
Handheld will be required to transmit start and stop characters
for Codabar and Code 39 labels.
Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if
configured) for validation of the label.
Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e.
labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated).
Standard PSC formats generally use a single prefix character. The
specific formats are provided below.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-1
36&ꢀ+DQGKHOGꢀ'DWDꢀ)RUPDWꢀ5HTXLUHPHQWV
The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typi-
cally observed in factory configurations of PSC handheld scanners.
566ꢃꢂꢅ
•
•
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
Check character must be included in label
Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and preceed the
base label
•
•
Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
Example: ‘R40101044123456789’
566ꢀ([SDQGHG
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
Check character must be included in label
83&ꢃ$
•
Number system must be included in label data.
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be 13.
Example: 'A060992011187'.
83&ꢃ$ꢀZLWKꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Number system must be included in label data.
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label.
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be 15.
•
Example: 'A06099201118712'.
F-2
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
83&ꢃ$ꢀZLWKꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Number system must be included in label data
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be 18
Example: 'A06099201118712345'
83&ꢃ$ꢀZLWKꢀ&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Number system must be included in label data.
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label.
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental
codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
•
•
Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
Example: 'A0609920111878100000951'.
83&ꢃ(
•
Number system must be included in label data
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be 9
Example: 'E09988750'
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-3
83&ꢃ(ꢀZLWKꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Number system must be included in label data.
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label.
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be 11.
•
Example: 'E0998875012'.
83&ꢃ(ꢀZLWKꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Number system must be included in label data.
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be 14.
Example: 'E0998875012345'.
83&ꢃ(ꢀZLWKꢀ&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Number system must be included in label data.
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label.
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be greater or equal to 15 (code 128 Supplemental codes
are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
•
•
Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
Example: 'E099887508101000951'.
F-4
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
($1ꢃꢋ
•
•
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct
Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be 10
Example: 'FF00210126'
($1ꢃꢋꢀZLWKꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label.
Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be 12.
•
Example: 'FF0021012612'.
($1ꢃꢋꢀZLWKꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
•
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be 15.
Example: 'FF0021012612345'.
($1ꢃꢋꢀZLWKꢀ&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label.
Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be greater than 16 (code 128 Supplemental codes are
variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
•
•
Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
Example: 'FF002101268102000951'.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-5
($1ꢃꢂꢄ
•
•
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be 14
Example: 'F1101234567891'
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀZLWKꢀꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be 16
•
Example: 'F110123456789112'
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀZLWKꢀꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
•
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be 19.
Example: 'F110123456789112345'.
($1ꢃꢂꢄꢀZLWKꢀ&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to base label
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be greater or equal to 20 (code 128 Supplemental codes
are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters)
•
•
Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'
Example: 'F11012345678918100000951'
F-6
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGHꢀꢄꢌ
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including start, stop and check characters and
excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this
symbology type.
•
•
•
Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
Prefix must be an ASCII character '*'.
Example : '**Code 39.TEST*'.
&RGHꢀꢄꢌꢃ3KDUPDFRGH
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including start, stop and check characters and
excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this
symbology type.
•
•
•
Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'p'.
Example: 'p*123456789*'.
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆ
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including check characters and excluding prefix
character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'i'.
Example: 'i0123456789'.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-7
&RGDEDU
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
acter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character '%'.
Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set
forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Char-
acter Match.
•
•
Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and
must be included in the label.
Example: '%s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the exam-
ple is a placeholder for the start stop character set).
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋ
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character '#'.
•
Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
•
Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value
8x. Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
x80 = function code 1
x81 = function code 2
x82 = function code 3
x83 = function code 4
For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general
form '#/82nnnnn/r ' - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage
return.
•
Example: '#Code_128.Test'.
F-8
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including check character and excluding prefix char-
acter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character '@'.
Example: '@144769254'.
&RGHꢀꢌꢄ
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character '&'.
•
Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
•
Example: '&Code93-test'.
3')ꢅꢂꢊ
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character 'P'.
Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 300 charac-
ters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must
meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable
label length control for this symbology type.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-9
$,0ꢀ)RUPDWV
AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label
data for transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC-A,
UPC-E and EAN-13 labels, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 will be received
from the handheld and transmitted by the scanner as EAN-13. The ’]’
character must be the first character received in the label transmission
from the handheld.
The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what spe-
cific label characteristics can be supported.
83&ꢃ$
•
AIM does not specify UPC-A as a separate symbology using this
transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
•
Example: ']E00060992011187'.
83&ꢃ(
•
AIM does not specify UPC-E as a separate symbology using this
transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
•
Example: ']E00000000998875'.
($1ꢃꢂꢄ
•
•
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E0'- total length including pre-
fix must be 16.
Example: ']E01101234567891'.
($1ꢃꢋ
•
•
•
Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E4' - total length including pre-
fix must be 11.
Example: ']E400210126'.
F-10
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
ꢁꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E1'.
length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5. Total
required length is 21 for EAN-13 and 16 for EAN-8.
•
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.
UPC-A 2-Digit addon
UPC-E 2-Digit addon
EAN-8 2-Digit addon
EAN-13 2-Digit addon
’]E00060992011187]E112’
’]E00000000998875]E112’
’]E400210126]E112’
’]E01101234567891]E112’
ꢆꢃ'LJLWꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E2'.
Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8. Total
required length is 24 for EAN-13 and 19 for EAN-8.
•
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.
UPC-A 5-Digit addon
UPC-E 5-Digit addon
EAN-8 5-Digit addon
EAN-13 5-Digit addon
’]E00060992011187]E212345’
’]E00000000998875]E212345’
’]E400210126]E212345’
’]E01101234567891]E212345’
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-11
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀ6XSSOHPHQWDO
•
•
•
Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']C0'.
length of Supplemental data including prefix is variable but must
be at least 9.
•
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.
UPC-A Code 128 addon
UPC-E Code 128 addon
EAN-8 Code 128 addon
EAN-13 Code 128 addon
’]E00060992011187]C08100000951’
’E00000000998875]C08100000951’
’]E400210126]C08100000951’
’]E01101234567891]C08100000951’
%RRNODQG
•
The 'Bookland' / ISBN code will be formatted as a vendor spe-
cific AIM label.
•
•
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']X0'.
length of label data including prefix is 13.
Examples: ']X01234567890'.
&RGHꢀꢄꢌ
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including start, stop and check characters and
excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this
symbology type.
•
•
•
Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']A0' or ']A1'.
Example: '*]A0Code 39.TEST*'.
F-12
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
&RGDEDU
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
acters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
•
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']F0'.
Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set
forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Char-
acter Match.
•
•
Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD
and must be included in the label.
Example: ']F0s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the
example is a placeholder for the start stop character set).
06,ꢎ3OHVVH\
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including check character and excluding prefix char-
acters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
•
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']M0'.
Example: ']M0144769254'.
&RGHꢀꢌꢄ
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']G0'.
•
Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
•
Example : ']G0Code93-test'.
566ꢃꢂꢅ
•
•
•
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
Check character must be included in label.
Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters.
Example: ']e001044123456789'.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-13
566ꢀ([SDQGHG
•
Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
•
Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 charac-
ter. Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the
scanner.
•
Example: ']e001900123456789083103001750'.
,ꢀꢁꢀRIꢀꢆ
•
Check character must be included in label data.
•
Label length including check characters and excluding prefix
characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scan-
ner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology
type.
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII character ']I1' (other prefixes specify
different check character properties which are not supported).
Example: ']I10123456789'.
&RGHꢀꢂꢁꢋꢀꢎꢀ($1ꢂꢁꢋ
•
Prefix must be either ASCII characters ']C0', ']C1' or ']C2'.
•
Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
•
If EAN-128 Symbology is Enabledꢀand prefix is ']C1', label will
be identified as an EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code
128.
•
•
•
A prefix of ']C0' designates that no function code is present in the
1st or 2nd character position.
A prefix of ']C2' designates that a function code 1 is present in
the 2nd character.
Example : ']C0Code_128.Test'.
F-14
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
3')ꢅꢂꢊ
•
•
Prefix must be an ASCII characters ']L0'.
Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 300 charac-
ters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must
meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable
label length control for this symbology type.
•
Example : ']L0pdf_test_label'.
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-15
127(6
F-16
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
127(6
3URGXFWꢀ5HIHUHQFHꢀ*XLGH
ꢀF-17
127(6
F-18
0DJHOODQ ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢃꢀ6FDQQHU
ASCII Character Set
The table on this page shows a set of ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values.
The Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology specific label identifiers, as well
as enabling custom prefix and suffix characters.
ASCII
Char.
ASCII
Char.
ASCII
Char.
ASCII
Char.
Hex
No.
Hex No.
Hex No.
Hex No.
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
SP
!
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
“
#
$
%
&
’
g
h
i
(
HT
)
LF
*
J
j
VT
+
,
K
L
k
l
FF
CR
-
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
m
n
o
p
q
r
SO
.
SI
/
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
SUB
ESC
FS
;
<
=
>
?
\
|
GS
]
}
RS
^
~
DEL
US
_
Asia Pacific
PSC Hong Kong
Italy
PSC S.p.A.
Hong Kong
Telephone: [852]-2-584-6210
Fax: [852]-2-521-0291
Vimercate (MI), Italy
Telephone: [39] (0) 39/62903.1
Fax: [39] (0) 39/6859496
Australia
PSC Asia Pacific Pty Ltd.
Japan
PSC Japan K.K.
North Ryde, Australia
Telephone: [61] 0 (2) 9878 8999
Fax: [61] 0 (2) 9878 8688
Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761
Fax: 81 (0)3 3491 6656
France
PSC S.A.R.L.
Latin America
PSC S.A., INC.
LES ULIS Cedex, France
Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00
Fax: [33].01.64 46.72.44
Miami, Florida, USA
Telephone: (305) 539-0111
Fax: (305) 539-0206
Germany
PSC GmbH
United Kingdom
PSC Bar Code Ltd.
Darmstadt, Germany
Telephone: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58-0
Fax: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58 58
Watford, England
Telephone: 44 (0) 1923 809500
Fax: 44 (0) 1923 809 505
Corp. Headquarters
PSC Inc.
PSC Inc.
959 Terry Street
www.pscnet.com
Portland, OR
Telephone: (503) 553-3920
Fax: (503) 553-3940
Eugene, OR
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
©2002 PSC INC.
R44-2384 (Rev. B)
3/03
|
